JP7416178B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is determined, and a performance is performed to suggest and notify the player of the determination result. However, if the result of the judgment is a win, a bonus game advantageous to the player may be executed.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the game as a presentation to suggest the result of the judgment.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a determining means capable of executing a determination, a display means on which identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means is displayed, and a gaming machine specified for the display means. a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when identification information for indicating the determination result of A dynamic display means, a variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. and a variable control means, the gaming machine comprising: the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means as a production pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means; The variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means can be determined based on at least the determination result of one of the determination means, and the variable means is in the first state. It is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the second state than in the other case, and the variable control means Even in a state where the identification information is not dynamically displayed, the variable means can be varied in a variable manner included in the production pattern , and in the gaming machine, the variable control means is configured to control the variable control means based on a predetermined operation pattern. Under a situation where the dynamic display of identification information cannot be performed, by operating an operating means that can be operated by a player, the variable means can be made variable in a variable manner included in the performance pattern. It is possible, and the gaming machine is capable of making it possible for a performance pattern that is executed in a shorter period of time than when the game machine is in the predetermined first gaming state to be more likely to be selected as a performance pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means. at least a second gaming state to be set, and when the second gaming state is set, the variable means is changed to the second state more than when the first gaming state is set. The present invention is configured to be able to easily be changed to the second state, and has means capable of executing a notification effect for forming a predetermined notification mode in combination with the variable means that is changed to the second state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a determining means capable of executing a determination, a display means displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a dynamic display means that is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern. , a variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and a variable control means capable of executing variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. The gaming machine has the operation pattern of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means as a presentation pattern for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the operation pattern of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable means to be executed can be determined based on at least the determination result of one of the determining means, and the variable means is in the first state. In the second state, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Even when the target is not displayed, the variable means can be varied in a variable manner included in the production pattern , and in the gaming machine, the variable control means dynamically controls the identification information based on a predetermined operation pattern. It is possible to bring the variable means into a state in which it is possible to change the variable means in a variable manner included in the performance pattern by operating the operation means operable by the player in a situation where the display cannot be executed; The gaming machine is configured to play a second game in which a performance pattern executed in a shorter period than in a predetermined first game state is more likely to be selected as a performance pattern for indicating the determination result of the determining means. At least the state can be set, and when the second gaming state is set, the variable means can be more easily varied to the second state than when the first gaming state is set. The apparatus is configured to have a means capable of executing a notification effect for forming a predetermined notification mode in combination with the variable means changed to the second state .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a 1st electric accessory. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the XXb-XXb line in FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device, and (b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view of the inner reel developed, and (b) is a front view of the outer reel developed. 30(a) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device in range XXXV in FIG. 34. FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 36(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). FIG. 3 is a front view of the segment display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of the segment display device. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit. 42(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a side view of a base member. 42(a) is a sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. 51(a) is a sectional view of the displacement member taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 51(a). FIG. It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 4th embodiment. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device in a 6th embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 72(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the left wing member in FIG. 98(b). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the Cb-Cb line in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 taken along the CIb-CIb line in FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit taken along the line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b). (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a decorative pattern display device in an 18th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 6 is a front view of the inner reel developed. FIG. 3 is a front view of the outer reel developed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a reel display during normal times in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during time saving. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery result during time reduction in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content showing the remaining number of time reductions. It is a figure showing display contents during production of special reach 1 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the reel display during special reach 2 performance in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display contents of the reel display when a jackpot is established from special reach 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when the conditions for special reach 3 are satisfied in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display contents of the reel stop display for the first variation of special reach 3. This is a diagram. It is a figure showing the display contents of the reel display of the second change of special reach 3. It is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices during the pseudo continuous performance in the first control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, special symbol reserved ball storage area, special symbol reserved ball execution area, and normal symbol reserved ball storage area in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the set first winning type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table for jackpot, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table for winning (normal), and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table for winning (probable). FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. , is a diagram schematically showing a long fluctuation variation pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol operation table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a special effect scenario table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol group storage area set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing a reel operation confirmation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing a remaining number display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flow chart which showed operation control processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the outer reel control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the inner reel control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the displacement member control process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the normal stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the time saving stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a second control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in a second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on a drawing list. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 1 in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 2. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to variation pattern A in the second control example. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to variation pattern B in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 2 table set in the fluctuation pattern selection table in the second control example. , is a diagram schematically showing a second table of variation patterns for deviation (probability variation). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop sound selection table set in the ROM of the present invention. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio output device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a second control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. It is a flow chart which showed ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 12 is a flowchart showing display image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which showed warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 12 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing commands executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command judgment process performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the BGM correction process performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 2nd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in another example of the second control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 6
3, the present invention will be described as a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment.
10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the terminal to the front area of the terminal 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 4, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front door 5.
and is provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, on the top surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 2 is provided.
2 is provided. This frame button 22 is used, for example, when changing the presentation mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or when changing the presentation content of Super Reach. operated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. (see 2)
A certificate stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball lending unit, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. be exposed.
Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. Return button 43
is operated when requesting the return of a card etc. inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of the game board 13, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 that stops firing the ball during the period of being pressed.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding the ball, there are rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63, and the first
It is constructed by assembling the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It will be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player.
The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front side of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is erected at an inner position of the outer rail 77. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is an area defined by the front surface of the gaming board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails.
(area in which the fired ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13 to prevent a ball that has been guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). 1st
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured such that the LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are: 15R guaranteed variable jackpot;
There are 4R surefire jackpot and 15R normal jackpot. First symbol display device 37A, 3
7B not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also indicates a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot in which the game moves to a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it means that the gaming state (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the second symbol's probability of winning has increased).

During probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 14
The time during which the first electric accessory 520 associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state (open state), the second prize opening 140 is in a closed state (closed state).
This makes it easier for the ball to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning A change may be made in which the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened is increased compared to the normal number of times. Also, during the probability change and time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol will not change, and the second winning opening 1
At least one of the time during which the first electric accessory 520 associated with 40 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is released per win may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened,
The number of times the first electric accessory 520 is released in a hit may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning hole 64 and a second winning hole 64.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in any of the winning holes 140,
A segment display device 600 and a decorative pattern display device 800 that display the third symbol in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display in 37B, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) configured as shown in FIG.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 are made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 of this embodiment include the main controller 1
10 (see FIG. 4), the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, while the decorative display corresponding to the display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is and displacement operation. In addition, instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game status.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the first through gate 66.
A variable display is performed in which a "○" symbol (not shown) and an "x" symbol (not shown) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, in the second symbol display device, after the variable display of the third symbol, “
The “×” symbol will be stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 52 attached to the second winning hole 140
0 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the time change or short time, the first hit per hit increases the probability of winning.
If you are making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time saving by increasing the open time or the number of times the electric accessory 520 is opened, etc., the variable display of the second symbol may be changed. This time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A lottery will be held to win the design. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, a “○” symbol will be displayed as a stop symbol in the fluctuating display,
If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device.
37B, a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. Note that in this embodiment, the first
Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same, the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. Let there be 3 pieces,
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 may be configured to be five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 520
is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, the first through gate 6
As a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to 6, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state (enlarged state). This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting").
), it is more advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for jackpot drawings by winning the first winning slot 64 and aiming for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. 15 by opening the first electric accessory 520 and winning the second prize opening 140.
It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). How to
It is possible to switch between hitting left-handed and hitting right-handed. Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first winning hole is set so that the jackpot stops. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special gaming state, the specified winning opening 6 which is normally closed
5a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds pass or until 10 balls are won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate.
It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 are placed in the first out port 7.
1 and are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
16 are housed in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100~
The box base 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Also,
A seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal,
It is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the dispensing control device 111
2 is provided with an operating knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM203
In addition, various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7A, 37B, display settings on the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800, and lottery of display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. The work area where the values are stored (
work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B,
A solenoid consisting of a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the forward direction centering on the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/Os, etc. are stored. have. RAM213 is pachinko machine 10
The configuration is such that data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 receives a power outage signal SG from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc.
1 is input, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
This is to control a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
(not being operated), the firing solenoid is energized in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) and preview presentation
It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, etc. performed in the. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 2
The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to 25, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.
In order to change the appearance displayed in , and change the content of the super reach,
An instruction is given to the display control device 114. When the display mode is changed, information regarding the changed display mode is included so that the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 display decorations corresponding to the changed display mode. A rear image change command is sent to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with the commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also includes a segment display device 60 from the display control device 114.
0 and a command (display command) representing the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 800.
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. It also controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 , the segment display device 600 , and the decorative pattern display device 800 , and controls the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 . This controls the display of the third symbol's variable effect, etc. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby controlling the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226. It is possible to match the output.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig.
(see) RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 is an AC 2
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and is used for various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and uses these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage. Necessary voltage is supplied to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like.
201 and each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. In addition, power supply section 2
51 maintains the output voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, to the normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage becomes less than 22 volts. configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be explained. Figure 5 shows game board 1
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of No. 3. In addition, in FIG. 13, a state in which the winning a prize opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is a game machine formed by dividing two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the area. In addition, the detailed structure of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.
FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operating unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 300. Moreover, FIGS. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in pairs on the upper and lower sides of the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted on both upper and lower sides, whereas in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 is extended to the vertically central position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a rear case 40 formed in a box shape.
0, and a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decoration unit 700 are housed in the internal space of the back case 400.

The back case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 401a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 6 is inserted through the opening 401a.
00 is arranged from the back side of the back case 400.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotatably displaced in the vertical direction, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are decorated. The player is configured to be able to visually recognize the manner in which the symbols change (rotate). Note that a detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400, and
The decorative pattern display device 800 is installed upside down. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 between the gaps, it is possible to , the decorative pattern display device 800 is made visible.

In addition, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660, and the displacement member 670 is moved between the decorative pattern display device 800. By displacing it forward, it is possible to create a presentation form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is made invisible to the player. Note that a detailed explanation of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decoration unit 700 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and the segment display device 600
A pair is placed above and below the The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that resembles the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, an LED base for emitting light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is configured to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29. First, the configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

FIG. 10(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500,
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 shows a base member 510
and an exploded perspective view of the first electric accessory 520.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning slot unit 500 is arranged on the front of the game board 13 (
(see FIG. 5), a first electric accessory 520 rotatably supported inside the base member 510, and a drive that applies driving force to the first electric accessory 520. unit 530.

The base member 510 includes a front base 511 disposed on the front side;
and a back base 512 arranged at a predetermined interval.

The front base 511 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protrusion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side, and a second protrusion portion 5 that protrudes from the lower end portion of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side.
11b, and a third protruding portion that protrudes at a position separated from the second protruding portion 511b by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.
It is formed mainly with a protrusion 511c.

Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where its front surface is visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed by unevenness on the front side.

The first protruding portion 511a is arranged so that the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (wing members 520L, 5
A plate member for preventing a game ball from being thrown into the second prize opening 140 formed in the back base 512 when the tip of the 20R is located above the rotating shaft (shaft member JB1). It is.

That is, the first protrusion 511a is formed at the upper part between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first protrusion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than.

Further, the first protruding portion 511a is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 1st protrusion part 511a can roll the upper surface and fall (flow down) below.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of its upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. Set. In addition, the second protruding part 511b includes an upright part 511b1 that is erected in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512, an engaging part 511b2 that protrudes from both left and right ends of the upright part 511b1, and a bottom part. 511b3.

Furthermore, a base member 511f including an LED that irradiates light onto the lower side of the upright portion 511b1 is disposed on the second protruding portion 511b. The LED of the base member 511f is arranged in such a manner that it emits light upward. Therefore, the area around the second winning hole 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The upright portions 511b1 are formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of the upright portions 511b1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and their upright tips are connected to each other. In addition, the upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is The height is set to match the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be rolled toward the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 is
He can pitch in at 40.

Further, the connecting portions of the upright portions 511b1 arranged in parallel are formed in a shape in which the circumferential center position is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 is transferred to the upright part 511.
It is possible to easily stay at the center position in the left and right direction of b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed outward, making it easier to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage with left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and are formed to protrude from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the upright portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. As a result, the recessed portion 511b3
A screw can be inserted into a through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side.

The third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512, and the third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position spaced apart in the left-right direction by the width of the second protrusion 511b and the first outlet 71 in the left-right direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first outlet 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first outlet 71. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the third protrusion 511c can be rolled toward the first out port 71 and entered into the first out port 71.

The pivot supports 511d are formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and are formed in two at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 in between. . The inner diameter of the shaft support 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later.
Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support 511d.

The back base 512 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body that is larger in front view shape than the front base 511 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player can directly view the front surface of the back base 512 that does not overlap with the front base 511 in the front-back direction.

Moreover, since the front base 511 is formed from a transparent material, the front base 511
The rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 in the area where the rear base 512 overlaps with the front base 511 . Furthermore, the player can visually recognize the game ball thrown between the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

The back base 512 has a first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and a second winning opening 140 formed on both sides of the second winning opening 140. a first out port 71 to be played, and a general winning port 63 formed above the first out port 71 on the right side when viewed from the front.
It is formed mainly by

The first prize opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), and protrudes in both front and back directions along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding tip on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 10(a)) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first prize opening 64 is formed with a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside, and
The bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning hole 140 is formed to penetrate below the first winning hole 64 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize opening 140 is formed in a square shape that is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 via the second prize opening 140. In addition, the second winning opening 140 includes a recessed portion 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, which will be described later, can be housed inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning a prize opening 140 is made into a state where the game ball can pass through and the protrusions 523L, 523R are inserted.

The shaft hole 512a is recessed from the front to the back side on both left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, inside.
It is formed into a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed to penetrate both left and right sides of the second winning port 140. 1st out port 7
Reference numeral 1 denotes a hole for collecting game balls that have flown down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its width in the vertical direction (short direction) is the same as the game ball. is set larger than the diameter of Further, the first out port 71 is formed so that its bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball that entered the first out port 71 is transferred to the game board 1.
He can throw the ball to the back side of 3.

A guide wall 512b is formed in the first out port 71, which is connected to the bottom surface of the first out port 71 and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and sending the ball to the first out port 71, and the upper surface thereof is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Furthermore, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b, it is possible to suppress the guide wall 512b from being damaged.

The front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the back base 512 assembled in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. This can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is a left wing member 520L located on the left side of the second prize opening 140 when viewed from the front.
and a right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in front view are formed as one unit.

Note that the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R have bulges 524L and 524R, which will be described later.
The only difference is the position of the left wing member 520L, and the other members are formed symmetrically across the second prize opening 140. Therefore, except for the bulging parts 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be explained, and the right wing member A detailed explanation of the member 520R will be omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is located upward in the direction of gravity by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530, which will be described later. It is possible to displace the second state (open state) in which the corner on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 140, and unless otherwise specified, the first state is shall be explained. Further, in the first state, the opposing side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R will be described with reference signs 526L, 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed around the through hole 521L from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L extending from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. A protrusion 523L protruding from the side and a through hole 5
A recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface of the 21L side, and a side surface 526L.
It is formed mainly of a bulging portion 524L that protrudes from the bulge and a shaft member JB1 that is inserted into the through hole 521L. Note that a detailed explanation of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical rod member formed from a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and has a through hole 521L.
The outer diameter is smaller than the inner diameter.

Further, the length of the shaft member JB1 in the axial direction is approximately equal to or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the back base 51
By inserting the end of the shaft member JB1 into the shaft hole 512a and the other end (end of the front base 511 side) inside the shaft support 511d, the shaft member JB1 is connected to the front base 511 and the back base. 512.

The left wing member 520L has dimensions in the front-back direction of the front base 511 and the back base 512.
is set smaller than the distance dimension between the opposite sides. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other. .

The recess 522L is formed around the axis of the through hole 521L from the front side, and the recess dimension is set smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner circumferential surface is set larger than the radius from the axis of the shaft support 511d to the outer circumferential surface.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other, it is possible to suppress the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 from coming into contact with the ground, and also to prevent the front surface of the wing member 520L and the front surface from coming into contact with the ground. The grounding part with the base 511 is connected to the recess 522L and the shaft support 5.
11d. Therefore, the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving the solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L is reduced, making it easier to rotate the wing member 520L.

In addition, since the pivot support 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the front base 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L.
11 and the rear base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Here, there has conventionally been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L,
When the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. Therefore, there was a problem that the cost of parts increased.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 has a through hole 5 formed in the wing member 520L.
21L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 can be separately arranged in the winning opening unit 500. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, only the wing member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component costs.

Furthermore, as described above, the front base 511 can be fastened to the rear base 512 from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the winning slot unit 500 of the game board 13 is attached, and the front base 5
11 can be removed. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

That is, when removing the front base 511 from the back side of the back base 512, the game board 1
Although it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the back base 512 after removing the winning opening unit 500 from 3, since the front base 511 is formed to be removable from the front side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. be able to. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 will be visible from the player side (front side), and the player , visual recognition of the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 may spoil the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting a screwdriver diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, the through hole 5
A screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via 11b4. Therefore, the through hole 511
Even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads of screws or the like that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, the player can move the front base 511 and the back base 512.
By visually checking the heads of the screws that connect the players, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600, which are visible through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13, are set at the level of the player's eye level. Therefore, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged below the player's eye level. As a result, the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 are difficult to see from the player's side, and it is more interesting for the player to see the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be prevented from being damaged.

Note that since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the heads of the screws can be visually recognized through the front base 511, but as described above, the front base 511 also has unevenness on the front side. Since a pattern is formed, light can be emitted in different directions depending on the thickness of the plate. Thereby, the heads of the screws that are visible through the front base 511 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 1
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) are
5 is a side view of a drive unit 530 and a first electric accessory 520. FIG. Figures 16(a) and 16(
b) is a front view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state. A state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531 and a solenoid 531.
31, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are disposed in a movable state. and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 includes a main body 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates electromagnetic force when electric power is passed through the wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body, and the movable body. The engagement portion 531c is attached to the distal end portion of the holder.

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction, and has electric wires disposed therein. A recessed portion recessed toward the back side is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the recessed portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide toward the back side (inside the main body 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body 531a and generating electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b on the opposite side to the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed into a disk shape with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and is disposed such that its axis is located approximately in the same line as the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and the connecting portion 5 extends in the left-right direction.
32a and two first protrusions 532 protruding from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side.
b, and a second protrusion 532c located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

In the sliding member 532, the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of a first case member 534, which will be described later. This results in
The sliding member 532 can be housed inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a includes a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engagement groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the recess 532a1 and recessed from the upper surface side, and formed on both left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c. It is formed mainly with a notch 532a3.

As described above, the recessed portion 532a1 is provided with the engaging portion 5 of the solenoid 531 in the engaging groove 532a2.
31c is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a. That is, the recessed portion 532a1 has a recessed surface formed in an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. As a result, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
can be suppressed from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set to be larger than the diameter of the engagement part 531c. Further, the engagement groove 532a2 has a width dimension in the left-right direction set to be larger than a diameter of the engagement part 531c, and a width dimension in the front-rear direction is approximately the same as a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement part 531c, or The thickness is larger than the thickness of the portion 531c in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engagement groove 532a
The engaging portion 531c can be inserted into the inside of 2.

The notch 532a3 is a cut for making it easier to elastically deform the sliding member 532 when connecting the first protrusion 532b (described later) to the rotating member 533, and as described above, the second protrusion 53
They are formed on both the right and left sides of the proximal end of 2c, and are incised toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. Engagement hole 53
2d is formed in the shape of a long hole in the front-rear direction, and has a first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the gravity direction from the front end and a first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the gravity direction from the rear end. second opening 53
2d2. Note that detailed explanations of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set such that the width in the vertical direction at the central portion in the front-rear direction (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the width in the vertical direction of a protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. As a result, the protrusion 5 is placed inside the engagement hole 532d.
33b can be placed.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above, and is also formed to protrude from the front side. Further, the second protrusion 532c includes an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. In addition, the standing wall 532c1
A detailed explanation will be given later.

The rotating member 533 has a plate-shaped body formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, with two parts separated by a predetermined width in the left-right direction.
They are arranged in parallel, and the opposite ends on one end side are connected by a connecting part 533a. The gap between the two opposing plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

The rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 533 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side.
c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from one end of the substantially L-shape in side view to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive part 533d that is recessed and formed at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shape in side view. Formed in preparation for.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces thereof is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recess 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be connected to the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. It can be held in a rotatable state relative to the second case member 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude on both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The dimensions are set to be approximately the same. Further, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the first protrusion 532b. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b.

Note that the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the distance between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, since the notch 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, the distance between the two first protrusions 532b facing each other can be easily widened. As a result, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the opposing inner surfaces in the left-right direction of the first case member 534 is the first case member 534.
The distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the protrusions 532b is approximately the same, or the first protrusion 532
The distance dimension is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of b. Thereby, in a state where the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the first protrusion 532b from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The drive portion 533d is formed in a concave manner from the front side toward the back side. Drive section 533d
can house the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the drive section 533
d is set to be larger in the vertical direction than the projections 523L and 523R. Drive section 533
By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state as the drive portion 533d is displaced. In addition, the first electric accessory 52
A detailed explanation of the displacement of 0 will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front with an open interior, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and a second case member 535 can be disposed in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 is formed to mainly include a recess 534a recessed toward the front in a notch on the back side, and an upright portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotating shaft 53
The rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534 by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotary member 3c accommodated therein.

The upright portion 534b is formed so that the lower inner circumferential surface of the second prize opening 140 of the back base 512 and the upright end surface thereof are set at the same height, extend toward the back side, and slope downward. be done.
As a result, when the drive unit 530 is disposed on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 is rolled on the upper surface of the upright portion 534b, and the second case member 5
He can throw the ball to 35.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 has a through hole 535a formed vertically.
Equipped with

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the game ball thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper part of the upright portion 534b is passed through the through hole 5.
The ball can be thrown downward via 35a. Thereby, the game ball that has flown down the game area and entered the second prize opening 140 can be collected.

Next, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it is pushed out to the front side (to the left in FIG. 15(a)) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (second opening 53
2d2 side). Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is located between the drive portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. That is, the rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 53.
A rotational force is constantly applied around the axis 3c in a direction that pushes down the drive portion 533d.

Therefore, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (the second opening 533
d2 side), it can stagnate above the second opening 533d2 without being guided to the inside of the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (lower side in FIG. 15A)).

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed down, the respective protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the driving portion 533d are pushed down. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are placed in a state in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L, 521R are located above the through holes 521L, 521R (first state (see FIG. 16(a))). Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b), when power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a causes the movable body 531b to move toward the main body 531a.
It is drawn into the interior of 1a.

Therefore, as the movable body 531b is displaced, the sliding member 532 connected to the distal end side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, since the rotating member 533 is always subjected to a rotational force around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d, the engagement hole 532d of the sliding member 532 The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 is slid inside the second opening 533d2 without being caught in the proximal end portion thereof.

At the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, the protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 comes into contact with the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) and on the back side (FIG. 15). (b) right side). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (to the upper side in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the wing member 520L has through holes 521L,
It is rotated about the axis of 521R, and the corner portions on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced outward to the left and right (a second state (see FIG. 16(b))).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the supply of power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body part 531a disappears, so that the main body part 531a and the connecting part 532a are
The movable body 531b is moved to the front side (Fig. 1
5 (a) left side). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, so that the recess depth of the first opening 532d1 toward the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 15(b)) is reduced. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is moved in the direction of gravity. It can be easily displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described. Figure 17(a)
And FIG. 17(b) shows the winning opening unit 50 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10(a).
FIG. In addition, FIG. 17(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are connected to the first protrusion 511a. placed nearby. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the left and right wing members 5
It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the opposing sides of 20L and 520R.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is connected to the movable body 531 from inside the main body portion 531a.
b is in a protruding state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17(a)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17(a)))
The distance L1 from to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is as follows:
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes forward, the game ball can flow between the opposing left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening 140 and rolling. That is, the sliding member 5 moves the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534.
The rolling of the game ball can be stopped by colliding with the standing wall 532c1 of 32. As a result, even if the player continues playing the game when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to prevent the store from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning a prize opening 140 is arranged in the downstream path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are in the first state. The ball is also spaced apart from the first protrusion 511a, and the distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball.
As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area can be moved by the side surfaces 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
It can be received by 6L and 526R and rolled into the second winning opening 140. That is, the first
When the electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second prize opening 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 has a movable body 531b inside the main body 531a.
is said to be in a drawn-in state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the back side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged at a position farther away from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17(b)))
The distance dimension L2 from to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is as follows:
It is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L,
By displacing 520R, the game ball flowing down the game area can easily enter the second winning hole 140, and the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be moved into the vertical position formed in the first case member 534. The ball can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the mounting portion 534b.

Furthermore, since the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slid in a direction that substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140, the feather member 520L, When 520R is damaged (or due to fraudulent activity) and opened, the erected wall 53
The game ball that is stopped by colliding with the ball 2c1 can be prevented from being pushed out in the opposite direction to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is connected to the solenoid 53.
When the game ball is opened by the drive of 1 and the game ball can enter the second winning hole 140, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck in the second winning hole 140. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the game ball can be smoothly guided inside the second winning opening.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, the first electric accessory 520 is damaged due to a fraudulent act by the player.
The case where the first state is displaced to the second state will be explained. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit 500. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

Note that in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the front base 51 is shown for ease of understanding.
1 is shown transparently. Further, in FIG. 19(a), the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state are illustrated, and in FIG. 19(b), when only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state The state of is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to a cheating act by the player , the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are connected to the second opening 53 of the engagement hole 532d.
2d2 is displaced inside. That is, since a space is formed in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), a description will be given of the displacement of the upright portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to a fraudulent act by the player. Figure 20(a)
is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 18(b). .

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's energizing action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 531
The position of the sliding member 532 is not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the upright wall 532c
The distance dimension L1 from the erected tip (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 20(a)) of the first case member 534 to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b of the first case member 534 is Set smaller than the diameter.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of wing members 520L and 520R are provided. 5
Driving means (solenoid 531) that applies driving force to open or close 20L and 520R.
) and the pair of wing members 520L, 520 by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531).
When R is opened, it is placed in a permissible position that allows the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140, and when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates entry of game balls into the second winning hole 140.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, since it is possible to forcibly open the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from the outside and then displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second prize opening 140 illegally. The problem was that the effect of regulating the situation was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside,
Since the arrangement of c1 is formed so that it can be maintained at the restricted position, it is possible to suppress the upright wall 532c1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in a closed state or the pair of wing members 520L
, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to move the standing wall 532c.
The distance dimension L3 from the erected tip (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 20(b)) of the first case member 534 to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b of the first case member 534 is the distance L3 of the game ball. Set smaller than the diameter. Therefore, if the first electric accessory 520 is stolen from the second prize opening 140 due to the player's fraudulent act,
Even if it is possible to throw a game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 532c1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140.
Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case will be described in which the second protrusion 532c is further pushed into the back side when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22(a) shows the drive unit 530 in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a).
FIG. 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b).

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the inside of the second opening 532d2 has a front side (FIG. 22(a)
) A protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface of the left side) is formed. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer circumferential surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed to have corresponding outer diameters. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the notch shape of the notch 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed into the back side from the state where only the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state due to fraudulent activity, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a). Then, the projection 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the back side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140 and the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 This can prevent the ball from rolling and being thrown.

Further, in this embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). As a result, the protrusion 532d3 moves into the notch 5.
When inserted into the inside of 33b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the rear side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further moved toward the rear side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. When a pushing force is applied to the projection 532d3, the direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the projection 532d3 and the notch 532b1 can be set to the direction in which the projection 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is placed in the second state.
It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the winning hole 140, rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534, and being thrown.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is transferred to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
A transmission mechanism is provided to transmit the signal to 0R, and the transmission mechanism operates between an open sliding position (the position shown in FIG. 17(b)) and a closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A sliding member 532 is slid between the sliding member 532 and the pair of wing members 520L, 5 are rotated to the open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position.
20R, and a rotating member 533 that is rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed sliding position and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. 532, when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the closed sliding position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the allowable position. When the rotating member 533 is placed in the open rotating position with the rotating member 532c1 being placed in the restriction position and the sliding member 532 being placed in the closed sliding position, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged. As a result, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is regulated, so that the game ball enters the second prize opening 14.
This makes it easier to prevent balls from being thrown to zero.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is placed in the closed sliding position. be done. In this state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position.
The regulating means can be maintained at the regulating position (the regulating means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R,
Entry of such game balls into the second winning hole 140 can be regulated by the regulating means.

Furthermore, an engagement hole 532d is provided extending in one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533, and a protrusion 533b is protruded from the other, and the protrusion 533b is slid along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size and make it difficult for regulations to be lifted.

That is, a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is provided by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) can be released accordingly. It's difficult to do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulges 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R
4L and 524R will be explained in detail. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500.
It is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the Vb line.

Note that in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b), the left-right direction when viewed from perspective is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). Further, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511, which was seen as transparent in FIG. 24(a), is shown as opaque. In addition, in FIG. 24(b), side surfaces 526L, 526R
The rolling direction of the game ball rolling is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F
side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed on the end portion on the side of the through hole 521R, and on the back side (see FIG. 24(b)
It is formed continuously on the end surface of the arrow B side).

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Furthermore, a first region is formed on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, which is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and has a size that does not abut the game ball guided through the first region. The bulges 524L, 524R are formed, and the side surfaces 526L, 5 of one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R)
The first region of 26R and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. They are placed at different positions in different directions.

Further, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is on the front side (FIG. 24(b)
The through hole 521L is formed so as to be inclined from the lower side (lower side) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)) toward the through hole 521L side. On the other hand, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R is formed so as to be inclined from the back side toward the front side toward the through hole 521R side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the side surfaces 526 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R
The case where a game ball is thrown to L, 526R will be explained. FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 25(a), 25(b), 26(a), and 26(b) are similar to FIG. 24(b).
This corresponds to the sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in . In addition, FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b)
), the transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are sequentially illustrated. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R. The game ball can be rolled to different positions in the front and back direction by the bulges 524L and 524R.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is on the front side (FIG. 25(
b) From the lower side) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)), it is formed to be inclined toward the through hole 521L side, so when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to increased resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is connected to the end surface on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled toward the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulged portion 524R.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R is on the back side (FIG. 25(
b) From the upper side) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)), it is formed to be inclined toward the through hole 521R side, so when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging part 524R, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to increased resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second prize opening 140) that is formed to allow the game ball to enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and also has a displacement A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that is configured to be movable. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their base ends rotatably supported. ) is exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other wing member A technique is disclosed in which second grooves are provided on the entire surface of each of the two grooves. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in mutually different directions, the guide surface (side surface 526L, 52
6R) and the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), respectively, even if the game balls are guided (rolled) at the same time, the respective game balls are different from each other. direction (one side is on the glass plate side and the other side is on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. Also, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R).
It may pass through from the other of the wing members 520L and 520R, and in this case,
Since the game ball is not entered into the ball entry hole (second winning hole 140), there is a problem in that the player's interest is lost.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 has a pair of bulges that protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulges 524L, 524R form the side surface 526L.
, 526R at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls that are guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R are guided (rolled) along the bulges 524L, 524.
By bringing it into contact with R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the pair of wing members 52
The game ball entering from one side of 0L, 520R can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R. Therefore, one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (wing members 520L, 520R
A game ball that enters from one of the wing members 520L and 520R (either one of the wing members 52
0L or 520R) can be prevented from passing through. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L and 520R, which are disposed across the second prize opening 140 and whose base end sides are rotatably supported, and includes a pair of bulging parts 524L,
524R protrudes from the respective side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and connects the bulges 524L, 524R of one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R to the other wing. Bulging portions 52 in members 520L and 520R
4L and 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so the game ball that is guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L and 526R is By abutting against the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R in one wing member 520L, 520R and the bulging portions 524L, 524R in the other wing member 520L, 520R are connected to the side surfaces 526L, 520R.
By being arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along R (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the wing members 520L, 520R), one wing member 520L
, 520R, the game ball that entered the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other wing member 520L,
When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R in 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R in the other wing member 520L and 520R. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one wing member 520L, 520R can be prevented from passing through the side surface 526L, 526R of the other wing member.
As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 140, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that game balls rolled from the left and right can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In other words, by setting the collision positions of the game balls at different positions in the front and back direction on the left and right sides,
As shown in Figure 25 (
b) It is easier to bounce back to the upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side that has been brought to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one of the game balls (in this embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) can easily enter the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball can be bounced back to the front side, thereby preventing collision. When doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140. Therefore, the second game ball that enters the second winning hole 140 later can enter the second winning hole 140 quickly. As a result, when game balls are thrown to both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progresses smoothly. You can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the proximal end side (through hole 521 side) than the distal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L, 526R. A rolling area can be ensured before the game ball comes into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second prize opening 140.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the base end side than the tip side of the wing members 520L, 520R.
The course of the game ball, which is deflected by contacting 24R, can be prevented from returning to the course before deflection before reaching the ball entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entry hole while keeping it in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and the game ball guided through the first region does not come into contact with the wing members 520L, 526R. Since the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed with the size, the side surfaces 526L, 526R
When the game ball that has entered the game ball rolls in the first area, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball, and the ball can smoothly enter the second winning hole 140.

In this case, one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (the wing member 520L,
520R) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the other wing member (
The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the wing members 520L and 520R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. , one wing member (either one of wing members 520L, 520R)
The first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R and the other wing member (wing member 520L, 52
Even if the game balls are guided (rolled) at the same time in the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on the other side of 0R, the game balls can be biased in different directions from each other. The ball can be smoothly entered into the second prize opening 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), left and right wing members 520L, 520R
When the game ball is thrown to one of the two, the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R
By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging portion 524L or 524R, the game ball is prevented from rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R and falling from the tips thereof. can.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524 formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R
R is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, so the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520
The game ball that rolls either side of R toward the second prize opening side is the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 5.
It can be rolled (pushed) to a position that coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other side of 20R in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled toward the back side (pushed together) and substantially coincides with the bulge 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled toward the front side (pushed together) and approximately coincides with the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position.

As a result, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high, the game ball rolls on the side surface 520 of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R.
Riding on 6L and 526R can be suppressed.

Here, the conventional winning opening unit 500 has side surfaces 526L, 526 of the first electric accessory 520.
Since R is formed on a smooth surface, a game ball thrown from one of the first electric accessories 520 rides on the other wing member 520L, 520R and flows down from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R. There was a problem with the ball being thrown to the field.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is formed with bulges 524L and 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball rolled from one wing member is It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulges 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by causing the game ball rolling on one wing member 520L, 520R to collide with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L, 526R and wing members 520L, 5
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown into the game area from the tip of the 20R.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). In addition, in FIG. 28(a), the first electric accessory 520
is in the first state, and FIG. 28(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portion 511b2 formed on the second protruding portion 511b of the front base 511 is connected to the recessed portions 525L, 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively.
It is placed inside 5R.

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L, 525R.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact with each other (see FIG. 28(a)), and in the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are in contact with each other. 524
The L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 comes into contact with the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L, 521R causes the corners of the feather members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R to move toward the second prize opening 140 side due to their own weight. It is considered to be the direction of rotation. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portion 525L
, 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), it is possible to suppress the wing members 520L, 520R from rotating under their own weight, and also to prevent the wing members 520L, 520R from rotating due to their own weight. It can be maintained in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R is provided in the engaging portion 511b2.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), so the wing members 520L, 5
The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R of 20R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount that the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed, so it is possible to suppress damage to the wing members 520L, 520R due to abutting the engagement portions 511b2.

That is, in this embodiment, the base member 5 rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R.
10, the base member 510 is provided with an engaging portion 511b2 that restricts the rotation of the wing members 520L, 520R by coming into contact with the wing members 520L, 520R,
Since the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R are brought into contact with the engagement portions 511b2 of 10, damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. That is, the bulging portions 524L, 5
24R is a portion protruding from the wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), so the portions of the wing members 520L, 520R whose rigidity is relatively high are connected to the base member 51.
Since it can be used as a stopper to be brought into contact with the engagement portion 511b2 of 0, the wing member 52
Damage to 0L and 520R can be suppressed.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed such that their side surfaces are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R, and in the closed state, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R. The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed together are at least connected to the base member 510.
Since the base member 510 is brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (side surface of the bulging portions 524L, 524R) that is far from the rotation axis (through holes 521L, 521R) is in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510.
Since the engagement portions 511b2 can be brought into contact with the wing members 520L and 520R, the reaction force input from the engagement portions 511b2 to the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. For example, the protruding end surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R may be connected to the engaging portion 511 of the base member 510.
Compared to the case where the engaging part 511b2 of the base member 510 is brought into contact with the second prize opening 1
40, and a space that becomes a flow path to the second prize opening 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be further suppressed.

When the wing members 520L, 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged below the upright portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)).
In other words, the upright portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L, 524R are provided protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the bulging portion 52
It becomes necessary to arrange the pair of wing members 520L, 520R further apart by the protruding height of the wing members 4L, 524R, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R increases.

On the other hand, this embodiment includes an upright portion 511b1 located between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R have the bulge 524L when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. , 524R are not formed, the opposing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulges 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R begin to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolling) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the bulging portion 524
By positioning the upright portion 511b1 between the opposing portions L and 524R, the game ball is placed between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
By discharging the ball from between the facing portions 524R, it is possible to avoid the game ball being caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. The game ball ejected from between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R by the upright portion 511b1 is placed on the side surfaces 526L and 5 in the area where the bulges 524L and 524R are not formed.
26R, the opposing interval at this position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, so the game ball will not be caught (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the spacing between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L, 524R are not protruded from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L521R rotates the corners of the wing members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the direction of gravity due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L, 525R
By abutting the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and the opposite end, rotation of the wing members 520L, 520R due to their own weight can be suppressed, and the wing members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating under their own weight. can be maintained in the second state.

Therefore, the drive portion 533d and the protrusion 5 described above regulate the displacement of the wing members 520L, 520R.
Since it can be performed at locations other than 23L and 523R, the drive portion 533d and the protrusion 523L
, 523R can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, since there is no need to make the parts large in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533, the rotating member 533 can be made smaller. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be downsized.

In addition, in the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R, and is located higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the second winning opening 140, so the side surfaces 526L, The game ball guided by 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b) )reference).

Further, as described above, the second protruding portion 511b has a wing member 520L, 520R side (second
A base member 511f including an LED that irradiates light on the winning opening 140 side) is arranged. Figure 28
As shown in (a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f is transmitted to the wing members 520L and 520R.
It can be easily made to enter the inside of the .

That is, by irradiating the concave portions of the concave portions 525L and 525R with LED light, the wing member 5
It is possible to suppress the LED light from being reflected on the outer surfaces of 20L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to easily allow light to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the wing members 520L, 52
The amount of light emitted from the inside of 0R to the player side can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily seen by the player even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material.

Furthermore, when the wing members 520L, 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L, 521R, thereby increasing the gap between the opposing first electric accessories 520. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second prize opening is transferred to the base member 511.
Irradiation can be facilitated by using the f LED. As a result, even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material, the game ball entering the second prize opening 140 can be easily recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the prize opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in range XXIX in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged at a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

A first out port 71 is formed inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 to collect game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 has a curved portion 7 formed into a curve with a larger curvature than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to make it easier for game balls to gather.
6a is formed.

Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 are connected to the lower end portion of the inner reel (the curved portion 76
The gap is enlarged in the portion where a is formed. As mentioned above, the winning opening unit 5
The front base 511 and rear base 512 of 00 are fastened together by inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protrusion 511b formed at approximately the center position of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 is placed above the curved portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29).
can be located in Therefore, when inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a
Since you can use the gap between the front base 511 and the back base 51 from the front side of the game board 13,
Easy to put on and take off from 2.

In addition, since the interior of the recessed portion 511b3 is made difficult for the player to see due to the inner rail 76, the player's interest may be reduced if the player sees the screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be restrained from doing so.

Next, the decorative pattern display device 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800.
It is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in (a). Figure 31
is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800.
0 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vehicle. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed.
FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that accommodates a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and a housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 therein, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and rotates the inner reel unit 810, and an outer reel unit 82 that is attached to the housing unit 880.
0 and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed at one end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (on the left side in FIG. 30(a)), and a rotating member 812 of the inner reel 811. and an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has decorative symbols arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Note that the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel have different arrangements of decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape with a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and an outer circumferential surface of the hub 812a and an inner circumferential surface of the rim 812b. It is formed mainly of spokes 812c.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have respective axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached to its outer circumferential surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the distance dimension in the circumferential direction at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without any gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811. That is, the hub 812a and the rim 81
The spokes 812c connecting the spokes 812c to the inner reel 811 are formed to be inclined toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (an annular member 813 described later) as they go radially inward. This results in
The hub 812a can be placed inside the inner reel 811. Also, spoke 812c
is formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and includes an inner opening 812c1 that opens between circumferentially adjacent spokes 812c.

The hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space closer to the annular member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. A drive motor KM1 that applies rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

In the drive motor KM1, the thickness of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811, and is located at the inner portion of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be made smaller.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotating shaft coaxially arranged in a straight line with the axis of the hub 812a.
That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As mentioned above,
Since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the drive motor K
The rotation of M1 allows the inner reel 811 to rotate around the axis of the inner reel 811. Thereby, the symbols decorated on the inner reels 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above,
Relatively low rigidity. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force or wind pressure of the rotation, making it impossible for the player to accurately recognize the symbols decorated around it.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 81 of the rotating member 812 on one end side.
2b are connected, and the annular member 813 is connected to the other end, so that when the inner reel unit 810 rotates, it is difficult to be displaced by its centrifugal force or wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can accurately recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel 811.

In addition, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet.
1 load can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and an outer reel 82 thereof.
A hub 823 formed in a disc shape with a diameter smaller than that of 1, and spokes 82 that connect the inner circumferential surface of one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30(a)) and the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.
2.

The outer reel 821 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction to be larger than the axial direction dimension of the inner reel 811 . Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. Note that the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the decoration mode will be described later.

The hub 823 is arranged so that its axis is coaxial with the outer reel 821 and
It is arranged at approximately the center position in the axial direction. Further, a drive motor KM2 that provides rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected to the hub 823.

The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, so that the spokes 822 and one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (see FIG.
0(a) left side). Further, the spokes 822 are connected to the hub 8
23 to an edge 824, and includes an opening 822a that opens between circumferentially adjacent spokes 822.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 has a position in the axial direction.
Since the position is approximately the same as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction, and a space is formed at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)), most of the drive motor KM2 is connected to the outer reel 821. can be placed inside. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The housing unit 880 is formed into a box-like body with an open front side, and can house the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The storage unit 880 includes a pair of left and right side walls 881 and an upper wall 8 disposed at the edge between the pair of side walls 881 facing each other.
82, a lower wall portion 883, and a rear wall portion 884.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-shaped body that is substantially rectangular in side view, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30(a)), and has a larger outer diameter than the outer diameter in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 30(b)). It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the left-right direction).

A drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and on the right side in front view (on the right side in FIG. 30(a)).
A drive motor KM1 that drives the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 (a) on the right side. That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are
It is rotationally displaced relative to the side wall portion 881.

Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulge portion 881a that bulges out in a curved shape corresponding to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 on the front side surface. Thereby, light emitted from the backlight unit 830 (described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. Further, by being formed from a metal material that generally has higher thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the accommodation unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, heat accumulates inside the storage unit 880,
Parts can be prevented from breaking.

The upper wall part 882 and the lower wall part 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the storage unit 880, and the upper part (upper part in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall part 881 and the lower part (in FIG. 30(b)) along the edges of the lower part).

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thereby, the distance dimension between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

Further, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883, which penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from accumulating inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to suppress parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

The back wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the back side of the storage unit 880, and is disposed along the edge of the back side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall portion 881.

The back wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(b)), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. and an upright portion 884b bent toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Thereby, when the outer reel 821 moves (swings) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of rotational movement, vibration, etc., it is possible to suppress the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is operating (swinging) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of the rotation operation, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is closed to the opening 884a. can be inserted inside. As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884.

Further, the opening 884a can improve the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the housing unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from remaining inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to prevent parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

Here, an opening 884 in the back wall portion 884 is larger than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821.
When the opening 884a is formed, the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a becomes low. Therefore, there was a risk that the rear wall portion 884 would bend.

Further, in this case, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881, but by increasing the distance between the opposing sides,
There was a problem that the unit itself of the decorative pattern display device 800 became large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, upright portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance from both left and right ends of the opening 884a to both left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the rate of plastic deformation when forming both the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from inside the inner reel 811 in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbols on the inner reel 811, and is disposed on the front inner side of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is the inner reel 8.
It is arranged coaxially with the axis of 11. Further, the width dimension of the backlight unit 830 in the axial direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction.

Further, the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length equivalent to three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the backlight unit 830 has a recess 831 that is recessed inward in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface.
Three are arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction. Therefore, between each of the recesses 831, a partition plate 832 is formed, which stands upright on the outside of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

A base member 833 including an LED for emitting light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the outer side of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

Electric power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the front region of the other base member 833. can be restrained from doing so. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the inner reel 811 to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be explained. FIG. 33(a) is a developed front view of the inner reel 811, and FIG. 33(b)
is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), a plurality of symbols are drawn on the inner reel 811 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). Note that, as described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one symbol is set to one third of the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is entirely formed of a material that can transmit light. In particular, the light transmittance of the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") is set higher than that of the surrounding blank area. Therefore, the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811
By irradiating light from the inner reel 811, the light from the LED can pass through the inner reel 811 and make the symbol part stand out. Therefore, if the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 are set to emit light, the inner reels 811 can be illuminated even if the inner reels 811 are not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The symbols can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, ten symbols of five types are drawn consecutively in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be visually recognized from the player side by a segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with symbols arranged in a different manner, and the player can see up to nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols using the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 active jackpot lines, 3 horizontally parallel and 2 diagonally crosswise. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols line up on any of the active lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated, and a non-transparent surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorative surface 821a is not decorated so that light can pass therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a through which light can pass is formed. Note that the non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, may be provided with a semi-transparent decoration that can transmit light.

The decorative pattern display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to display the non-decorative surface 821a.
By facing the player, the symbols on the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821 can be made visible to the player. That is, the player can visually recognize the symbols on the inner reels 811 through the non-decorative surfaces 821a of the outer reels 821.

The non-transparent surface 821b is made non-transparent to light by applying black decoration to the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 (on the near side in FIG. 33(b)). Further, the non-transparent surface 821b is formed so that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols on the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, by setting the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction to be equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, the outer reel unit 820 can be rotated and the outer reel 82
By arranging the non-transparent surface 1 on the player side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

Note that the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction is the same as the length of the pattern 3 decorated on the inner reel 811.
The length in the circumferential direction is not limited to more than two minutes, and it is sufficient that the length in the circumferential direction is such that the decoration of the inner reel 811 cannot be seen from the player's side. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transparent surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be viewed from the player side.

Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmission area 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmission area 821b1 is a part that displays 7 segments by being combined with a segment display device 600 to be described later, and can partially transmit the light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This makes it possible to form part of a 7-segment display to be described later.

The symbols 821b2 are formed with a circumferential length equal to three of the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel is arranged so that three symbols 821b2 of each decorative symbol display device 800 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

Further, as described above, since the area around the symbol 821b2 is non-transparent, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the symbols on the inner reel 811 stop on the active line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 line up. Therefore, outer reel 8
After the player is made to look at the outer reel 821 by the rotation performance of 21, the player can be made to look at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time as the performance on the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 8
20 will be explained. FIG. 34 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in range XXXV of FIG. 34. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the opposing inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, a predetermined gap is formed between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 protruding radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34). A gap is formed.

A hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on an extension line of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusion 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a first reel (outer reel unit 820) formed to be rotatable,
The second reel (inner reel unit 810) is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and is rotatably formed (i.e., has a double reel structure). ) gaming machines are known. There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. There is.

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is,
In the double reel structure, a space is secured between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) to arrange the rotating brush described above. Therefore, the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel and the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrowly, in order to remove dust (dust) that has entered and stuck between the opposing surfaces, it is necessary to display a decorative pattern. The device 800 is difficult to clean because it requires disassembly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the protrusion 812a1 can push out air and generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the opposing gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is narrower than the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824
The water can flow from the space on the inner circumferential side of the hub 812a to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in this embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 82 formed in a cylindrical shape.
1, and an edge 824 extending radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821,
The inner reel unit 810 has an inner reel 811 formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval, and is stretched radially inward from one axial side of the inner reel 811. a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge 824 at a predetermined interval, and a protrusion 812a extending from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge 824.
1 is erected, the protrusion 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure, and using this wind pressure, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 is Air can flow between the inner reel 811 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, there is a gap between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the openings and the divided parts, which weakens the wind pressure and causes the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. It becomes difficult to do so.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are By displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the two, the wind pressure generated can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the protrusion 81 extends between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.
Using the wind pressure generated by the displacement of 2a1 in the circumferential direction, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Further, the protrusion 812a1 partially narrows the opposing distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate wind by utilizing changes in atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, so that the wind can be easily generated. Dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in detail, air tends to flow from high pressure to low pressure, and the protrusion 812a
By narrowing the distance between the protruding tip of the reel 1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the air pressure can be partially increased. Therefore, the inner reel 811 is less susceptible to changes in atmospheric pressure.
The air pressure in the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is made lower than the air pressure between the opposing tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, and dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 facing each other can be increased, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 812a1 from displacing (wobbling) toward the edge 824 or the edge 824 toward the protrusion 812a1. It can be suppressed.

Also, spokes 822 that support the edge 824 and spokes 81 that support the hub 812a.
Since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1, the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is directed to the outside through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. Air can be evacuated (or air can be drawn in from the outside between the inner surface of edge 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are connected by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. This allows the air between them to flow more easily.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is provided upright on the hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spoke 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing flow resistance by taking in (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily achieved. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other one on which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , resistance to air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed to be slightly inclined radially outward (with its diameter expanded) from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send air flowing from one end side to the other end side between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. can prevent sticking.

Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the outside in the radial direction is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 to the outside in the radial direction (
θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) where they overlap in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 34), they face each other outward in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in the distance between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to The wind can be easily generated between the inner circumferential surface and the opposing inner circumferential surface.

To explain in detail, the distance between opposing spokes 812c and spokes 822 is increased toward the radially outer side of inner reel 811 and outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the opposing spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. be made expensive.

As mentioned above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form a flow of air from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the shaft side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge 824 facing each other. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
In other words, since the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more often than the outer reel unit 820, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel In the production by rotating the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

Note that by rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is determined without any operation by the player (the game ball is not launched into the gaming area). It is preferable to perform this when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols on the inner reel 811 can attract the player's interest.

Further, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is made invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without making the cleaning state visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since cleaning can be performed during the gaming state, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dirt such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63.
First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right side when viewed from the front,
Vertical displacement unit 600C arranged between left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R
are horizontally arranged side by side, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

In addition, since the configurations of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are almost the same, in the following, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be explained. Detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.
FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

Note that FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 illustrate a state in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and first segment units 6 disposed on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650.
10 and a second segment unit 620.

Note that the first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. be. Furthermore, since the first segment unit 610 is only formed by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below.
The code in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 is similarly given to the first segment unit 610.

Each vertical displacement unit 600L, 600C, 600R is formed with a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 arranged differently, and the vertical displacement unit 61
In 0C, the second segment unit 620 is arranged only on the right side when viewed from the front, and the vertical displacement unit 610
In R, the second segment unit 620 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front, and display two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. In addition, the vertical displacement unit 600C is
Two segments can be displayed only on the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600
L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. In other words, one segment can be formed on both the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. Figure 42 (
a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the second segment unit 620.
20 is a rear view. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG.
4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmitting member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, and a partition member 622 disposed on the rear side of the light transmitting member 621. Mainly includes a plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the camera, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. It is formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light transmitting portion 621a formed in the shape of an arcuate plate convex toward the front side, and a flat portion 621b continuously formed above and below the light transmitting portion 621a. Ru.

The light transmitting part 621a includes an erected wall 621a1 erected from the left and right ends to the back side, a fastening part 621a2 projecting in an annular shape from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and a fastening part 621a2 extending in the vertical direction at the left and right center position on the front side. The decorative portion 621a3 is formed continuously from the decorative portion 621a3, which is recessed on the back side.

The standing wall 621a1 is formed to stand up from the left and right ends of the light transmitting part 621a on the back side. The dimension between the facing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to restrict the partition member 622 from moving from side to side.

The fastening part 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole in which a reflecting member 625 (described later) is fastened with a screw, and is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the light transmitting part 621a. Therefore, the fastening portion 621a2
The reflective member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of a screw into the inner edge of the reflective member 625.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the horizontally central position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light that passes through the left side when viewed from the front from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the light that passes through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The flat part 621b is formed into a plate-shaped body having substantially the same shape in front view as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened by fastening a screw through the flat part 621b. can do.

Furthermore, an elastic piece 621b1 is formed to protrude from the plane portion 621b and protrudes from the opposite side. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed to protrude from opposing side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower plane parts 621b, and protrude in a curved shape convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting part 621a, and its protruding tip is connected to the displacement unit 65.
The decorative pattern display device 800 is arranged in a manner such that it comes into contact with an upper wall portion 882 or a lower wall portion 883 of the decorative pattern display device 800. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress the decorative symbol display device 800 from vibrating.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is the same as that of the light transmitting portion 6
The radius is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set to be smaller than the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the partition member 622 can be disposed with the outer circumferential surface of the partition member 622 in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from both left and right end surfaces (left and right in FIG. 42), and a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from the upper and lower end surfaces (top and bottom in FIG. 42). It is formed mainly of a second recessed part 622b provided therein, and a protrusion part 622c projected from the left and right center position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed in parallel in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portions 622a are formed at four locations in the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by being recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposing ends of the second recessed portions 622b is set to be approximately the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portions 621a2 formed on the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting member 621, by inserting the fastening part 621a2 inside the second recessed part 622b,
Movement of the partition member 622 in the vertical direction can be suppressed.

The protruding portion 622c is formed at the horizontally central position of the partition member 622 and extends in the vertical direction. Further, the protruding portion 622c includes a recessed portion 622c1 formed in the distal end surface of the protruding portion. The width of the recess 622c1 in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness of the base member 624, which will be described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the partition member 622, the recess 62
The distal end side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the base member 2c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy-white resin material and can diffuse light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and its outer peripheral portion (
The radius of the partition member 622 (front side) is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622.
Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the back side of the partition member 622 in a grounded state.

Further, two diffusion members 623 are arranged vertically in parallel, and two are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance apart. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the back side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the facing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the protruding portion 622c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusion member 623 from moving from side to side.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a protrusion 623a that protrudes toward the front side, and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protrusion 623a.

The protruding part 623a is formed in a protruding manner at a position corresponding to the first recessed part 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is inserted into the first recessed part 622a. will be established. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the partition member 622 from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions.

Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the protrusion 623a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, the protruding portion 623a is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the protruding tip surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The concave portion 623b has a protrusion 62 on the opposite side to the protrusion 623a (on the back side of the diffusion member 623).
It is recessed and formed into a slightly smaller shape than the front view shape of 3a. is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when molding the diffusion member 623 can be suppressed. Further, by forming the recessed portion 623b in a slightly smaller shape than the protruding portion 623a, the area on the back side of the end of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, more light can be incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a, which will be described later, at the end of the protrusion 623a. As a result, the mode of light that is visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made clearer, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the recessed end surface of the recessed portion 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, the base member 62
4 on the back side of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is placed in the recess 6 of the partition member 622.
By inserting it inside the base member 22c1, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from shifting in the left-right direction.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged on both left and right sides of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction is
It is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the direction of light irradiation from the LED 624a is
It is assumed to be in the left and right direction. Note that a detailed explanation of the light irradiation from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. Reflective member 6
The reference numeral 25 is made of a white resin material and has a convex arc shape on the front side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the diffusing member 623. Thereby, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflective member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is spaced from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side toward the front side, and includes an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side toward the front side, and the inclined portion 625a. A plurality of recesses 625b are vertically arranged on the front side of the recess 625b, and a wall portion 62 is formed at the upper end, lower end, and middle part of the recess 625b to protrude toward the front side.
5c.

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflective surface 625a1 that reflects the light from the LED 624a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed to be inclined at approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624.
As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, so the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624, so that the LED 624a It is possible to reflect the light emitted from the front side. In addition, L
The manner in which light travels through the ED 624a will be described later.

The recessed portion 625b is formed in a convex curved shape on the back side. Further, the recessed portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, thereby making it possible to make the amount of light from the LED 624a visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). Note that in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The direction of reflection can be directed outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed from a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625)
The space can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, a rotation device (decorative pattern display device 800) is formed to be rotatable and a plurality of rotation cylinders are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the rotation cylinders is arranged along between the plurality of rotation cylinders. A decorative member (light transmitting member 621) whose portion is light transmitting, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. A game machine is known in which a board is arranged with a surface on which means is mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of a decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern of the decorative member integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting member 62.
Since the reflecting member 625 is provided to reflect the light to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, even if the base member 624 is arranged with the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621,
It is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 with the light emitted from the LED 624a. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller.
A sense of unity can be created between the display device and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front. Since the decorative pattern display device 800 is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought closer to each other, the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 It is possible to easily create a sense of unity between the display device 800 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Furthermore, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, thereby forming a region on the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and a pattern on the light transmitting member 621. Since the back surface of the reflective member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed). The decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved to the back side (the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player.
This makes it easier to form a sense of unity with people.

Further, since the LED 624a is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the other side surface are different from the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one side surface. The light transmitting member 62 has different designs depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.
1 can be formed (displayed) independently.

In this case, the base member 624 disposed between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged in parallel.
The number of sheets can be reduced to one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be suppressed, the decorative pattern display device 800 can be inserted deeper into the back side of the light transmitting member 621 (
The decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), The direction of reflection can be directed outward. As a result, (reflecting surface 625a1 is
The reflective member 625 can be made smaller (than if it were angled at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed close to each other, so that it becomes easier to form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. Figure 47 shows the XL of Figure 42(a).
FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line VII-XLVII.

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed into a square shape when viewed from the side, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. This causes LED624
The heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from becoming partially heated and damaging the LED 624a.

Note that in this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Also, L.E.
D624a is arranged in such a direction that one side of the square light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, conventionally, a substrate (base member 62
4) and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmitting member (light transmitting portion 621a of the light transmitting member 621) is formed in a curved manner, and a plurality of A gaming machine in which light emitting means are arranged along the curve of a transparent member is known. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem in that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means becomes uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the LEDs 624a are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, so that the distance between each LED 624a and the adjacent LED 624a can be constant, and the LEDs 624a
The distribution of heat emitted by 4a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby increasing the lifespan of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of inclination θ1. Therefore, the distance between the LEDs 624a in the vertical direction is narrower on the center side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflective member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center in the vertical direction becomes darker), making the light uniformly visible to the player. The problem was that it could not be done.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. It will be arranged as follows. That is, in a front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a reflecting member 625 is provided that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a, and the reflecting member 625 has a plurality of recesses 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. The light transmitting portion 62 of the plurality of recesses 625b
Since the partition widths of 1a are set to be substantially the same when viewed from the front, the light amount of each recess 625b that is visually recognized when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front can be made substantially the same. As a result, multiple LEDs 624
The distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same, the player The area of light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated to the player side can be suppressed from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly visible to the player.

Further, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, for example,
Compared to the case where the light emitting surface is circular, light diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted over a wider angle), so the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in the first recess 625b.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a has one side of the light emitting surface connected to the light transmitting portion 621a.
Since the LED 624a is disposed along the tangential direction of the curved shape, the light emitted from the LED 624a can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Further, the recessed portion 625b is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and recessed toward the side away from the rear surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, so that the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is
21a and the recessed portion 625b, the base member 624 faces the light transmitting portion 621a.
can be arranged in orthogonal positions. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625 can be increased. In this case, LED624
Since the recess 625b is arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the light emitted from the light emitting surface a from a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the light travels, the light reflected by the recess 625b is uniformly directed to the back surface of the light transmitting part 621a. It can be made incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIG. 48, LED6
The light irradiated by 24a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is also illustrated with the reference numeral of irradiation region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 61
0 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation areas SR1 arranged in a 2×2 pattern vertically and horizontally. Note that the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621.

Therefore, by using the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620, it is possible to display both the left and right sides of numbers in a 7-segment display. Note that the upper, lower, and center positions of the numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.
FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that FIGS. 49 and 50 show the disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 rotatably supported by the base members 660, and a displacement member 670 disposed on the base member 660. The displacement member 670 mainly includes a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed from a pair of left and right plate members having a space in the center that is larger than the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. Furthermore, a first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side when viewed from the front. Note that the base members 660 are arranged vertically and horizontally oppositely on the left and right sides, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and a description of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and includes a protrusion portion 661 that curves and protrudes from the front side surface in a convex shape toward the front side. In addition, the base member 66
0 is a through-hole 662 through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 disposed at one end in the vertical direction (upper end) is inserted, and a connecting rod 681 disposed at both ends in the up-down direction (lower end) is inserted through. insertion hole 66
3, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 (to be described later) is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 opening in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and an engagement projecting into the venue above and below the recess 664. 666.

The radius of the protruding tip of the protruding portion 661 is set to be smaller than the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set to be substantially colinear with the curved axis of the reflecting member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 661 and the reflective member 625 from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 is Intrusion between the opposing base members 660 can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 8 disposed inside the opposing base member 660
It is possible to prevent the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from breaking due to an increase in the temperature of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. In addition, drive motor KM3
are attached to the base member 660 from the opposing sides of the base members 660 disposed opposite to each other.

The through hole 662 is a hole into which a connecting rod 681 of a driving means 680 to be described later is inserted, and is formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rod 681 and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recessed portion 664 is formed in a circular shape recessed outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting protrusion 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. Thereby, the connecting protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

The sliding groove 665 can be inserted into the displacement member 67 by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670.
0 and a driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660. Also,
With the connecting protrusion 671b inserted into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 so that its tip has a gap larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later.
Thereby, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in opposite directions in a pair of upper and lower positions. The displacement member 670 is formed from an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a decorative unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are arranged in pairs with left and right opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end of the longitudinal side, a connecting protrusion 671b protruding to the left and right outside at a substantially central position on the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a extending from the side surface of the longitudinal side.
The extension member 671 mainly includes a projection 671d projecting in the circumferential direction of the extension member 71a, and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extension member 671.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, while inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a, the collar C
By fastening and fixing the displacement member 670 to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, the displacement member 670 can be rotatably connected to the base member 660.

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 on the same axis, and by inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

Furthermore, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one of the shaft support holes 671a. The outer diameter of the bulging portion 671a1 is the same as that of the base member 660.
The inner diameter of the recess 664 is slightly smaller than that of the recess 664 . Further, the bulging portions 671a1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in this embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the right shaft support hole 67 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side is formed.
1a is placed inside the bulge 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671
In a, since the bulging part 671a1 is formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side, the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side is formed as a bulge part. 67
It is placed inside 1a1 (see FIG. 49).

Thereby, the collar C allows the bulge 671a1 to be inserted into the recess 664 when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660. As a result, the shaft support hole 6 of the displacement member 670
When a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft 71a, the outer circumferential surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner circumferential surface of the recessed portion 664 come into contact with each other, so that damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement member 6
When a force is applied in the radial direction to the rotating shaft of 70, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. Therefore, the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged, and the bulging portion 67
Due to the contact between 1a1 and the recess 664, the force acting in the radial direction on the rotation axis of the displacement member 670 can be maintained. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through hole 671d1 that penetrates in the longitudinal direction of the extending member 671 is formed in the protrusion 671d. The through hole 671d1 is a hole into which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is disposed on a side surface of an extending member 671 on the side in which a pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, which will be described later, approach each other. Further, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed close to each other, the sizes are set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.
The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body with one end connected to a side surface of the large-diameter gear 683.
A first link member 684 whose other end is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side through the base member 660, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates. and a second link member 686 formed into a rod-shaped body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

As described above, the gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b that protrudes in an annular shape from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. It is formed by Since the large diameter gear 683 has a gear surface 683a meshed with the gear 682,
It is rotated by rotating the gear 682. That is, it is rotated by rotationally driving the drive motor KM3.

The protrusion 683b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed into a rod-shaped body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof to pass through in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated into the large diameter gear 683. Can be linked in the state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the insertion hole 684b and fastening the tip of the connecting projection 671b with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 due to the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683, and the projection 683b is rotated. The first link member 684 to which one end is connected is displaced, and the first link member 684
A displacement member 670 connected to the other end is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed on the left side in front view, and is fitted into the rotating shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to a cam member 685. Therefore, the connecting rod 681 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, and the cam member 685 is rotated.

The cam member 685 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted into the shaft portion thereof. The cam member 685 also has a protrusion 685a that protrudes outward from its axial side surface in an annular shape.
Equipped with The protrusion 685a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed to have the same shape as the first link member 684, which is horizontally reversed. The second link member 686 includes insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated by the cam member 685. You can connect with .

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotated, and one end is attached to the protrusion 685a. The second link member 686 to be connected is displaced, and the second link member 68
A displacement member 670 connected to the other end of 6 is displaced.

That is, this is performed by displacing the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to suppress tilting when the displacement member 670 is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. Figure 51 (
51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 shows LII of 51(a)
FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 taken along the line I-LIII.

As described above, the displacement member 670 includes an extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the shorter side (the connecting side of the decorative unit 672). Extension members 67 arranged in a pair on the left and right
A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a step-like manner is provided on the surface where the connecting portions 671c of 1 face each other.
is formed. The stepped portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thereby, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extending member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and emits light to the player side. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and disposed on the front side of the back cover 673,
Mainly includes a base member 674 disposed between the back cover 673 and the front cover 676 facing each other, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676. be done.

The back cover 673 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened together.

Further, the back cover 673 is made of a resin material that is difficult to transmit light (non-transparent).
The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a that is recessed and formed on the back side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflective portion 673a is formed at the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and its inner surface is painted white with high light reflectance. Thereby, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflection part 673a can be reflected inside the reflection part 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 has substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is disposed to cover the front side of the rear cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed into a laterally elongated rectangular plate-shaped body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674, there are first LEDs 674a that are arranged side by side on the lower edge in the left and right direction and emit light to the diffusion member 675 side, and are arranged above the first LED 674a and emit light to the lens member 677. A second LED 674b that emits light.

The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675, and
The base member 674 is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light downward. As a result, the first LED 674a
It is possible to suppress the light emitted from the lens member 677 from entering the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost. It can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the diffusion member 6
The light from the second LED 674b can be incident on a lens member 677 disposed above the LED 75.

The diffusion member 675 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material that can diffuse the light incident therein. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material and has a plurality of protrusions formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily made to enter the inside through the protrusion on the back side. As a result, the second LED 67
Even if the amount of light emitted from 4b is reduced, the light can be made to enter the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted by the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of displacement member 670. In addition, in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is 2.
It is illustrated with a dashed dotted line and is labeled with the reference numeral of irradiation region SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is
The lower end of the decorative unit 672 (front cover 676) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 670
0, the irradiation area SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore,
The irradiation areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 allow upper and lower numbers to be displayed using a 7-segment display.

Next, the seven segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. Note that FIGS. 55 and 56 illustrate a state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player, and
The irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmission region 821b1 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 55, the irradiation areas SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed in two lines in the vertical direction and six lines in the left and right direction. It is said to be in a state of

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as a set of four lights with the decorative pattern display device 800 sandwiched between them, and three sets of the lights are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between one set of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmission region 821b1 is arranged at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides. Therefore, 7
Numbers can be displayed in 7-segment display using the irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 of the book and the transmission area 821b1.

As described above, three sets of four radiation areas SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, so each set forms a 7-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left and right direction.

Therefore, numbers can be displayed on the 7-segment displays arranged in parallel in the left-right direction as valid lottery lines for jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the segment "7" can be displayed on all 7-segment displays). ) Thereby, it is possible to display not only the jackpot by the above-mentioned decorative symbol display device 800 but also the jackpot by the 7-segment display. As a result, the player can view a plurality of display formats, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Here, the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 6 of the segment display device 600
The light transmitting portion 621a of No. 20 is formed to be curved in a convex shape toward the front side, so that when the player views the 7-segment display, the display in the center portion in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger; The display at both ends in the vertical direction that is far from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible for the player to clearly see the display of the numbers in seven segments.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width of the 7-segment display in the left-right direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. This makes it possible to uniformize the overall display of the seven segments at the upper and lower ends and at the upper and lower center positions. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment numbers displayed.

Further, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the center portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This allows the player to clearly see the seven segment displays formed on both the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Also,
The segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, the 7-segment display is viewed by the player in a curved manner as the distance from the player's viewpoint to the left and right increases. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction, the 7-segment display is curved and difficult to visually recognize from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.
FIGS. 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Figure 58 (
a), FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 58(b), FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 60(b) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. LVIIIb-LVII
It is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L along the Ib line.

Note that in FIGS. 57(a), 58(a), and 58(b), the displacement member 670 is shown in a retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 In (b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in an intermediate state is illustrated, and in FIGS. 57(c), 60(a), and 60(
In b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in an extended state is illustrated.

In addition, the retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower sides are spaced apart from each other upwardly and outwardly, and the extended state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displaceable members 670 disposed in an upper and lower pair are separated from each other. The member 670 is in contact with each other at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is as follows.
This is a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, in the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state,
The displacement member 670 arranged in the upper part (upper part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower parts has the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 located above, so that the shaft support hole 671a can be used as the rotation axis. The decorative unit 672 is positioned upward.

Further, a torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1)
It is considered to be the proximal part of. Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the displacement member 670 to maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 disposed in the lower part (lower part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower parts is arranged so that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located in the lower part.
The decoration unit 672 is positioned downward with the rotation axis 71a.

Further, a torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below
P2 has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1)
It is considered to be the proximal part of. Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decorative unit 672 can be easily displaced upward in the direction of gravity by the displacement member 670.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the opposing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

When rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 6
84 and the second link member 686 are displaced to approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the insertion holes 684b and 6 of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686
The displacement member 670 connected to the shaft 86b is rotationally displaced around the shaft support hole 671a, and as shown in FIG.
) and the states shown in FIG. 59 to the states shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state position, the torsion spring S is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

Further, a torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side
Similar to the P2 torsion spring SP1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (the through hole 67
1d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

In the intermediate state, a smaller opening than in the retracted state is formed between the facing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed to the player.

Therefore, from the retracted state in which three symbols are displayed vertically on the inner reel 811,
The displacement member 670 is moved to an intermediate state in which one figure side to be decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction.
By displacing the game, a plurality of performance modes can be created and the player's interest can be increased. Further, by displaying one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, it is possible to draw the player's attention to one symbol. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the part to which attention should be drawn, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring S is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

Further, a torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side
Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the engagement position of P2 with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (the through hole 6
71d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

That is, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thereby, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force is applied to the torsion spring SP1.
, can be easily granted from SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the extended state, the decoration units 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are brought into contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 8 is viewed from the player side (front side).
The display of 00 can be made invisible.

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 in the extended state, rotating and displacing the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are aligned to the player ( It is easy to create a sense of anticipation (a lottery was held for a jackpot). As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

Note that in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower positions are displaced by the same amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 provided is rotated. In this way, only one side of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can be displaced to an intermediate position or an extended position.

Further, the maximum displacement amount of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is not set at an intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. 60. That is, the pair of displacement members 6
70 can be moved up and down while in contact with it.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that in FIGS. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are given a U at the end of the reference numerals, and
A displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and a driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a letter D added to the end of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes an extension member 671 of the displacement member 670.
are placed on both the left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 have a driven side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681, and a driving side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to either one.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the displacement members 670 arranged vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other. .

Here, a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) which are disposed facing each other and are formed to be movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine equipped with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where their opposing sides abut, an object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be visually recognized. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the object. , it is also possible to perform a presentation (a presentation that draws attention to the operation of removing the mask) before the mask is removed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to make the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member come into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the driving means 6 that displaceably support the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D on the base member 660, respectively.
80U and a driving means 680D, the supporting aspect of the driving means 680U is the decoration unit 67.
2U is biased to one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U, and to one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672D that is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672D that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U. Since the supporting manner of the driving means 680D is biased, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, the supporting manner of the driving means 680U and the supporting manner of the driving means 680D are on opposite sides ( The center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides can be rotated by 180 degrees). As a result, the decoration unit 67
Opposing sides of 2U and decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between opposing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of constituent members arranged is different between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction),
The driving forces transmitted to the left and right sides of the decoration unit 672 are different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can have their more rigid side (lower side) facing the other party's less rigid side (higher side). can. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and pushes the other on the side with lower rigidity. Then, you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the other person. As a result, decoration unit 672U and decoration unit 6
The opposite sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposite sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates driving force and a decoration unit 672U.
a pair of extension members 671U that connects the base member to the base member, and a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively, and have mutually different configurations. The drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and a drive motor KM3U that drives the pair of extension members 671U. The second link member 686D and the first link member 686D each transmit force and have different configurations.
Since the link member 684D is provided, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D
It is possible to easily bring the opposite sides of the sheet into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D may be on the side where the driving force is larger or on the side where the driving force is transmitted earlier, for example. In addition to pushing the opponent (moving forward), it is possible to create a state in which the opponent is accepted (retreating) on the side where the driving force is smaller or when the driving force is transmitted later. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Further, the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Decorative unit 672U
When the decorative unit 672D is reciprocated in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when using the bias of the support mode.

Further, an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material is provided on the extending member 671U or 671D, and when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other on opposite sides, the elastic member 671f is made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U is driven by the driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, and the decorative unit 672U is driven by the driving motor KM3U.
The driving means 680D includes a pair of extension members 671U connected to the extension member 671U, and two torsion springs SP1 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively, and a drive motor KM3D that generates a driving force. , a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D. , the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposite sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other party on the side where the urging force is large, and also The side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, decoration unit 672U and decoration unit 6
The opposite sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposite sides can be suppressed.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be made different by different positions where the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extension members 671U. The drive means 680D includes a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the 671U, and the drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D that generates a drive force.
, a pair of extending members 671D driven by the drive motor KM3D and connecting the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extending members 671D. Since the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are provided with a member, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D, for example, pushes (advances) the other on the side where the biasing force is applied, and , it is possible to form a state in which the side to which the biasing force is not applied accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U, and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and the decorative unit 672U is connected to the decorative unit 6.
Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided to apply a biasing force in the direction of approaching the decorative unit 672D, when displacing the decorative unit 672U in the direction of approaching the decorative unit 672D, the extension member 67
The driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate 1U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the decoration unit 672D to the contact position where it is in contact with the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be smoothly started.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in a direction that brings the decoration unit 672U closer to the decoration unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 changes. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is spaced apart from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied is longer, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction closer to the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by a collision can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, thereby increasing the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement. It is possible to improve the production effect.

On the other hand, the torsion spring is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connecting positions of the legs and the base member is separated from the winding part, the torsion spring SP
The torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as that of 1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Furthermore, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (arranged in the direction of gravity), and the position where they contact each other is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. (Retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity, the configurations of torsion spring SP1 and torsion spring SP2 are particularly effective.

Since the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the further the decoration unit 672U is positioned downward in the direction of gravity, the more the decoration unit 6
The biasing force in the direction of displacing 72U upward in the direction of gravity can be strengthened (i.e., the decoration unit 6
The higher the position of 72U in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decorative unit 672U from a stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when stopping the raised decorative unit 672U, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage to the decoration unit 672D due to collision can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. I can do it. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 is formed as a torsion spring, has one leg connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg to the base member 660, and applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. Since the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in the direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved upward in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the
The driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in a direction that brings the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 changes. Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (in the direction of gravity) is The biasing force in the upward direction can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 includes an outer reel unit 820.
A protrusion 2812a1 is formed that protrudes toward the edge 824 side. The protrusion 2812a1 is the hub 8
They are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of 12a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved into a bowl shape. As a result, the inner reel unit 8
When 10 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved into a bowl shape, its rigidity can be higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
If the tip of the projection 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820 due to wobbling when the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, damage to the projection 2812a can be suppressed.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824. In addition,
The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment, and FIG.
) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is a partial enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820.
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along the line XVIb-LXVIb.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, an edge 824 on an extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 has a protrusion 382 that protrudes toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810.
4a is formed. The protrusion 3824a is located on the outside of each spoke 3822 (outer reel 821 side)
Formed at the end.

The protrusion 3824a is formed so that both sides thereof are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.
Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, inner reel 811
It is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812
Although a case has been described in which the protrusion 4812a is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a, the protrusion 4812a formed on the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. It is formed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68(b) is a partial enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG.
FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 4812 taken along the line IIb-LXVIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a projection 4812a1 that projects toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and the longitudinal direction and the hub 812a
It is formed in such a manner that the radial direction intersects with the radial direction. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a. Also,
The direction of inclination is inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed out air (wind) is transferred to the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821.
By colliding with the outer reel 821, the outer reel 821 flows into the gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821.
Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a, and the direction of the inclination is the same as the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since the inner reel unit 810 is positioned on the direction side, wind can be easily generated by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
In other words, since the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more frequently than the outer reel unit 820, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel In the production by rotating the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are
Although a case has been described in which the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed to be inclined toward the edge 824 side of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward, in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed so as to be inclined radially outward. Accordingly, the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be inclined on the opposite side to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment. Figure 70(a
) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is a partial enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG.
It is a sectional view of the annular member 813 along the line LXXb. Note that in the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment is
The spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are formed to be inclined toward the opposite side from the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820
The inclination direction of the spokes 822 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Also, the edge 8 of the outer reel unit 820 of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810
A protrusion 5813a is formed to protrude from the surface facing 24 (see FIG. 70). Protrusion 5813
A plurality of a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a mountain shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) is transferred to the edge 8 of the opposing outer reel 821.
By colliding with 24, the reel flows into the gap between the facing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, inner reel 8
Dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer circumferential surface of the reel 11 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, the distance between the opposing sides (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. There was fear.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. This makes it easier to take in air from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800.
Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 681
2a1, 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. Figure 72(a
) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is a partial enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 6812 taken along the line Ib-LXXIIb. FIG. 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is a partial enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820.
FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along line b-LXXIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, a protrusion 6812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812. Protrusion 2812a1
are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the inner side of the rotating member 6812 in the radial direction than the protrusion 6824a. This can prevent the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6
Wind can be generated by 812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

Further, in this case, the air pushed out by either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. This results in
Dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, so that the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 If any of the edges 824 are rotated,
Wind pressure can be generated by displacing the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, when the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Slanted surfaces are formed on surfaces of the projection 6812a1 and the projection 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. Thereby, air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily blow away the dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick.

Further, the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6812a1 and the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6824a are different. Thereby, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824
By overlapping in the radial direction, the positions at which air is compressed can be distributed over a plurality of positions. As a result, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and air is compressed, so that the rotational speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being slowed down.

Next, the rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven symmetrically in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven differently on the left and right sides. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, which are arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion 533a between opposing ends of the rotating member 7533. It is connected and formed by. In addition, the plate-like bodies disposed at both left and right ends are approximately L in shape in side view.
The left and right sides have different bending angles. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the left side when viewed from the front is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the driving portion 7533d formed in a recessed manner on the other end side of the rotating member 7533 (left side in FIG. 74(b)) is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. Further, the drive unit 7533d is
The width of the recess (width in the vertical direction on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) is formed larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the protrusion 523 can slide inside the drive part 7533d. is formed.

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left and right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the rotating member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from one end of the substantially L-shape in side view to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive part 7533d that is recessed and formed at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shape in side view. Formed in preparation for.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

In addition, in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), the first state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIG. 75(c).
) and FIG. 76(c) show that the second state of the first electric accessory 520 is as shown in FIG. 75(b) and FIG. 76(b).
1 and 2 respectively illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located between the first state and the second state. Further, in FIGS. 75 and 76, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
When the main body portion 531a is extended from the inside, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 75(a)), and the driving portion 7533d is positioned downward.
Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is created between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This moves the protrusion 523R to the drive section 753.
3d to bring the right wing member 520R to the first state by pushing it down to a certain position, the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R switches to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) in front view, and the right wing member 5
It is formed by rotating 20R by its own weight to the first state.

Also, the inside of the left drive part 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (Fig.
5(a) lower side).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 53 of the solenoid 531
1b into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 75(b)), and the drive portion 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving part 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving part 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the right wing member 520
The initiation of displacement of R to the second state is faster.

Next, through the states shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and
The first electric accessory 520 is in the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This moves the protrusion 523L to the drive unit 7.
533d to push the left wing member 520L up to a certain position to bring it into the second state, the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L switches to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521L) in front view, and the left wing member 520L is moved by its own weight. It is formed by rotating it to the first state.

Also, the inside of the right drive part 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (Fig.
5(a) lower side).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 5
20R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state later than the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 5
20L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state before the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

In addition, FIG. 77(a) and FIG. 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). Moreover, in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the first electric accessory 520 changes from the second state to the first state.
When the left wing member 520L is displaced to the state, the left wing member 520L is started first, and the right wing member 520L is started.
The displacement of 0R to the first state is made slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, it is possible to instantaneously create a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. will be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the game ball to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, the bulging portion 524L
A game ball collided with L is easily bounced back to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the bulging portion 5
By displacing the left wing member 520L on the side where 24L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side after the left wing member 520L, a game where the ball is entered during the displacement to the first state. The ball can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) is placed in a position forming a closed state, and the timing when the other wing member (The other of the wing members 520L, 520R) is disposed at a position where the closed state is formed.
This makes it difficult for the game ball to get caught between the pair of wing members 520L, 526R).
The opposing distance between 0Rs can be narrowed. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the second protrusion 532 restricts the entry of game balls into the sliding member 532.
In the eighth embodiment, the rotary member 8533 is provided with a second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531,
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are disposed in a movable state. It is formed mainly of a member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The sliding member 8532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, and two first pieces protruding toward the front from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. Protrusion 53
2b, and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

The sliding member 8532 has a dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a that is equal to that of the first case member 53.
It is formed to be smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of No. 4. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be housed inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state can be restricted. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from one end of the substantially L-shape in side view to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive portion 533d recessed and formed at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shape in side view. The second protrusion 8533e is formed to protrude toward the front side from the center position in the left-right direction of the portion 533a.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and includes an upright wall 8533e1 bent downward and erected at its protruding tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front when viewed from the side, and its curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.
79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
FIG. FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. 79(a), FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. (
In b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, Figure 8
1(a) and FIG. 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is connected to the main body 531.
When the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is extended from the front side (Fig. 79(a)
left side), and the driving portion 533d is placed in a lower position. This allows the first
The electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state when the protrusion 523 is pushed down.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8
533e1 can suppress the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to shift to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is transferred to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
It is equipped with a transmission mechanism that transmits the signal to 0R, and the transmission mechanism operates between an open sliding position (the position shown in FIG. 79(b)) and a closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. 79(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A sliding member 8532 is slid between the sliding member 8532 and the pair of wing members 520L are rotated to the open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the open sliding position.
, 520R, and a rotating member 8533 that is rotated to the closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position, so that at least the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be closed. is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotating position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the allowable position. is placed in the regulating position, the sliding member 8532 is placed in the closed sliding position, and the rotating member 853 is placed in the closed sliding position.
3 is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are engaged, and the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted, so that the game ball is in the second position. It is possible to easily control illegal entry of balls into the winning slot.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from the outside, or by directly operating the rotating member 8533, the rotating member 8533 can be closed. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating member 8533 to the open position, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position, thereby restricting the standing wall 8533e1. (i.e., the standing wall 8
533e1 can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). the result,
The erected wall 8533e1 can prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Also, a third protrusion 8532 protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533)
e, and a sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533) that can engage with the third projection 8532e.
), and the third protrusion 8532e protrudes along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532.
It is possible to switch between engagement and disengagement between the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) that the third protrusion 8532e can abut, or a hole or a recess into which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position by the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a recess. The third protrusion 8532e is connected to the connecting portion 5
33a, the space required for arranging the third protrusion 8532e can be reduced and the size can be reduced.
This is because the third protrusion 8532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520
b is in a second state where it is pushed upward.

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located on the back side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. the result,
By rotating the rotating member 8533, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced.

Therefore, the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 has an open side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion 8533d1 that rotates toward the closed rotation position. Since it is provided with a closing side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L, 520R when the wing members 520L, 520R are opened, it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from being illegally forced open from the outside, and prevent rotation. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to turn it towards it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position. Contact part 8
It can be regulated by 533d2. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to extend from the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that entered the second winning hole 140 is placed in the upright part 534.
The ball can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged. Figure 82
(a) and FIG. 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIG. 82(a)
82(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. Further, FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric accessory 520 are broken from the base end due to fraud or deterioration over time, and the first electric accessory 520 is When the state changes from the state to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. Ru. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in a closed state or the pair of wing members 520
Since the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the restricted position in a state where L and 520R are opened from the outside, it is possible to prevent the standing wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in a closed state or the pair of wing members 520L
, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to move the standing wall 853
3e1 (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the first case member 53
The distance dimension L6 to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in 4 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, if the first electric accessory 520 is stolen from the second winning slot 1 due to the player's fraudulent act,
Even if it is possible to throw the game ball at 40, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the second protrusion 8533e
Since the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the protrusion is integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is connected to the main body 531.
Although the case has been described in which the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when it is extended from a,
In the ninth embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531,
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are disposed in a movable state. It is formed mainly of a member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 9533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from one end of the substantially L-shape in side view to both sides in the left-right direction, a protrusion 9533d protruding to the front side at the other end of the substantially L-shape in side view, and a connecting part. It is mainly formed to include a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes from the center position in the left-right direction of 533a toward the front side.

The protruding portion 9533d is formed so as to protrude from the end on the front side, and its upper part (FIG. 84(
a) Upper) The length is set such that the projections 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R can come into contact with the side surface.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.
84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
FIG. FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 84 and 85, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. In addition, in FIGS. 84(a), 85(a), and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 84(b), FIG. 85(b), and FIG. (
In b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, Figure 8
6(a) and FIG. 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is connected to the main body 531.
When the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is extended from the front side (Fig. 84(a)
left side), and the protruding portion 9533f is positioned downward. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down and brought into the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. A biasing force for rotational displacement is constantly applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of a pachinko machine), it can be suppressed from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520
3b is in a second state where it is pushed upward.

In this case, the protruding portion 9533f and the protrusions 523L, 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by projecting the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body 531a from the second state and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring and 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is fraudulently operated. FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. In addition, Figure 8
7(a) and FIG. 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. In addition, in FIG. 87(a), the first
The state in which the electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIG. 87(b), where the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.
The respective states are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by a fraudulent act by the player. When changing from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, the erected wall 8533e1 allows the game ball to roll on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b and the second protrusion 8533e.
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown to the case member 535.

This (with the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protruding from the main body 531a)
In this case, as described above, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the store due to fraudulent activity by the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the second protrusion from being displaced are connected to the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8.
532, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being damaged due to fraudulent activity by the player. As a result, losses to the store due to fraudulent activity by players can be suppressed.

That is, the ninth embodiment includes a biasing spring that biases the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the pair of wing members 5
20L, 520R to open them, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R do not come into contact with the rotating member 9533, and external force due to such forced opening is applied to the rotating member 9533. can be avoided. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

Note that the biasing means for constantly applying a biasing force for rotationally displacing the first electric accessory 520 toward the first state is a spring (torsion) that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force. Examples include not only springs and coil springs, but also magnets that bias the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with an attractive force.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is small (or large) displaced in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. By doing so, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed.
Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes the extension member 6
71, an extending member 10671 disposed opposite to the extending member 671, a decoration unit 672 connected to the extending member 10671 and the extending member 671, and a decorative unit 672 that is rotatable to the extending member. The rotary member 10678 is mainly provided.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a that penetrates in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end of the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a that extends outward from the left and right at the approximately central position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side. The rotating shaft 10671e is formed in a cylindrical shape and projects from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotating member 10678 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and extends from the extending member 10671 with its longitudinal direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extending member 10671 at a substantially right angle.
will be placed in

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, and a through hole 10678 formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction.
b, and an inclined surface 10678c formed by cutting out the side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotation axis 1067
1e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwed to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extending member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.
FIG. 90 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). In addition, FIGS. 91(a) and 91(
In b), the state when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced is illustrated, and FIG. 91(b)
Here, a cross section is shown in which the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 90, the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment includes a displacement member 670 on the upper side, a displacement member 10670 on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670, 10670. The axes of the supporting holes 671a are arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged vertically in opposite directions, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670. Note that the driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670, 10670 arranged above and below are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extending members 671, 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In a state where the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91(b), the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. This results in
Rotating member 1067 is in a state where inclined surface 10678c is approximately parallel to the side surface of extension member 671.
8 is rotated around the shaft support hole 10678a (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft support hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same way. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming away from each other.

Further, since the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670,
When the driving force is transmitted from the drive motor KM3 to the drive side (the side connected to the projection 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the driving force is reduced, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is increased due to the displacement of the rotating member 10678. can be increased to compensate for the lack of driving force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600 of the eleventh embodiment
L will be explained. In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 670 from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 11670 from only one side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation will be omitted.

Also, in FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 600L is similar to FIGS. 61 to 63.
The displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 are given a U at the end, and the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L.
The driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with the suffix D appended to the reference numeral.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of a vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670, but in the eleventh embodiment,
The extension member 671 is placed only on one side.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive means 680 is on the drive side (the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683).
The extending member 671 is connected to a drive means on the drive side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged horizontally oppositely in the upper and lower directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the displacement members 11670 disposed vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both from the state shown in FIG. 93 in the same direction, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side becomes slow, and there is a risk that a gap may be formed between the two decoration units 672. In some cases, the extending members 671 are arranged vertically and horizontally oppositely, so that the end of one decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side is connected to the other decorative unit 67.
It can be pushed at the drive side end of 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

To explain in detail, the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, so that the drive side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first becomes the decoration unit that is driven later. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first on the opposite side to the drive side is brought into contact with the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later on the drive side with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is provided on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extending member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extension members 671) are deformed, and the elastic force when the displacement returns is By using this, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 51 of the winning opening unit 500 are
Although the case where the thickness of the front base 51 is substantially constant has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the front base 51
1 and the thickness of the rear base 512 are partially changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). Note that in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. In addition, FIG. 95(b
), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed with partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, the second
A front side bulging portion 12511f that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper right side of the winning opening 140.

Further, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, a back side bulging part 12512d that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140.

The front side bulging part 12511f and the back side bulging part 12512d are a pair of wing members 520L,
It is formed outside the displacement area of 520R. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R
Collision between the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d is suppressed.

In addition, the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d have their ends in the left-right direction (FIG. 95(b) left and right direction) located on the outside. Thereby, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R can surely collide with the front side bulge part 12511f and the back side bulge part 12512d. I can do it.

The front bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front side bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the rear side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is moved to the front side bulging portion 1251.
It can be guided to the back side by colliding with 1f. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the back side bulging part 12512d and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, the game balls that are guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are guided by the bulging portion 52.
By bringing it into contact with 4L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball throwing speed can be slowed down by causing the game balls thrown by the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front side bulge portion 12511f and the back side bulge portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact upon collision with the bulges 524L, 524R can be reduced, and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512 of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG.
6(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96(a). Note that in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. Also, Figure 96
In (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 has a back base 51 on the left side of the second winning opening 140.
A protrusion 13511g protruding to the second side is formed. In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement area of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R and the protrusion 13511
Collision between g and the protrusion 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e corresponds to the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L.
It is formed on the side surface opposite to the formation position in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought to the front side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the wing member 520R can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R does not collide with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R.
The ball was thrown to 6R. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the back side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the wing member 520L can be suppressed.

Moreover, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L does not collide with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L.
The ball will be thrown to 6L. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, the game balls that are guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are guided by the bulging portion 52.
By bringing it into contact with 4L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the projections 13511g and 13512e can reduce the number of game balls colliding with the bulges 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R, the wing members 520
The durability of L and 520R can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, wing members 14520L, 145 of the fourteenth embodiment
20R (first variable device 14520) will be explained. Feather member 1452 of the fourteenth embodiment
0L and 14520R are formed so that the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is different from that of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG.
7(b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 98(a) shows the winning opening unit 5
00, and FIG. 98(b) is a cross-sectional view of XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a).
98(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L along the line, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R taken along the line VIIIc-XCVIIIc.

Note that, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the perspective directions in the left-right direction are shown reversed. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the virtual line K
The front direction of S1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the rear direction is illustrated by arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. Left wing member 14520
L is a through hole 521L that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, and the through hole 521L
a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the rear side around the through hole 521L, a protrusion 523L protruding from the vicinity of the through hole 521L toward the rear side, and a recessed portion 523L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end face on the through hole 521L side. recessed portion 525L, and a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in the closed state.
side surface 14526L of the opposing surface of
524L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed from the substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the front side.
6L2.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 are transferred to the smooth surface 145 due to the downward slope.
It can be guided to the 2L2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)) of the inclined surface 14526L1. The width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction is equal to that of the wing member 1452.
It is formed smaller than half of the width of 0L in the front-rear direction. That is, the width of the bulging portion 15254L in the front-back direction is smaller than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-back direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so
The probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L collides with the bulging portion 14524L can be reduced.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-back direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L that is recessed around the through hole 521R from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L that extends from the vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side. A protrusion 523R protruding from the
and a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end face on the side of the through hole 521R;
Side surfaces 1452 of opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state
6R and a protruding portion 14524R formed protrudingly from the side surface 14526R.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the front side.
6R2.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 are transferred to the smooth surface 145 due to the downward slope.
You can guide them to the 2R2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction is equal to that of the wing member 1452.
It is formed larger than half of the width of 0L in the front-rear direction. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-back direction is made larger than the width of the bulge 14524L in the front-back direction. Therefore, left wing member 1
The width of the bulge 1 of the right wing member 14520R is wider than the width of the bulge 14524L of the 4520L in the front-rear direction.
4524R has a larger width in the front-rear direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526R2, so
The probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R collides with the bulge 14524R can be reduced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a manner that the game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R in an open state. Ru. To explain in detail, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pair of wing members 520L,
A first through gate 66 with 520R in an open state is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and is configured so that the game ball is launched toward the left side of the center frame 86 during time saving or probability change. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. It becomes easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L is
There was a problem that many game balls were thrown, and the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L wore out quickly, making the left wing member 14520L easy to break.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are inclined surfaces 1452 on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R.
6L1, 14526R1, and the inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1
bulges 14524L and 14524R are formed on the bulge 14 on the side where more game balls are thrown.
Since 524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the wing member 1 on the side where many balls are thrown is
By reducing the probability that a game ball will collide with the bulge 14524L of 4520L, the bulge 1
It is possible to prevent the 4524L from wearing out quickly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing members 14520L, 14520R on the side where more game balls are thrown from becoming easily broken.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, variable prize winning device 150 in the fifteenth embodiment
65 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L, 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulges 15065b, 15065c are formed on the variable winning device 65. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99(b) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment.
) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. Figure 100
100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the Cb-Cb line in FIG. 100(a).

Note that FIGS. 99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 29. Further, FIG. 99 shows a closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows an open state of the variable winning device 15065. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

In addition, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the variable winning device 15065 formed in a board state
The plane of 065 is located approximately parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area is in a state where it is impossible to enter the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is located approximately perpendicular to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the gaming area are ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is elongated from side to side, and is rotatably arranged with respect to the game board 13 around one end on the back side. Also,
The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between a closed state position and an open state position. be done.

Furthermore, in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 has two protruding portions 15065b and 15065c formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side. Furthermore, variable winning device 1506
The side surfaces 15065a of No. 5 are formed to be inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side, and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the front side in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the back side in the alveolar state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.
They are formed on both the left and right sides with the two in between, and are also formed at different positions in the front and back direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and bouncing back to the left and right sides. .

To explain in detail, the game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging part 15065b and is guided to the back side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a side. Ru. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a when viewed from the front collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a side.

Therefore, the forward and backward position of the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a is determined by the bulge 1.
5065b and bulge 15065c, it can be displaced. Therefore, side 15
When the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of 065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of a specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, the direction of the rebound (repulsion) can be set to the front and rear directions. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In addition, when the game ball is thrown from either the left or right side of the side surface 15065a, the bulging portion 15065a
By causing the game ball to collide with one of the bulging portions 15065c and 15065c and displacing the position in the front-back direction, when the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the front side of the side surface 15065a, the game ball is moved to the bulging portion 150.
65b or the other of the bulged portions 15065c. As a result, the side 150
The game ball thrown from one side of 65a can be suppressed from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and slipping out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of bulges. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions across the ball entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulges 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

Moreover, one bulge part 15065b, 15065c and the other bulge part 15065b, 150
65c are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a), so that the variable winning device 150
When a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of 65 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of bulges 15065b, 15065c. Therefore, one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065
It is possible to suppress the game balls that have entered from the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 to flow out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 was made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is A third protrusion 16532e is provided in the recess of the portion 533a.
This is done by inserting . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 85 in the sixteenth embodiment.
101(b) is a front view of the 30, and FIG. 101(b) is a front view of the first
FIG. 101(c) is a sectional view of the electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530, and FIG.
It is a sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 along the CIc-CIc line in (b).

As shown in FIG. 101, a concave portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side is formed in the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in rear view.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to protrude at a position facing the above-mentioned recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-back direction. The shape of the third protrusion 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and has a tapered tip.

As a result, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in the closed state, the recessed portion 16
The third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside 533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e
Since the third protrusion 16532e is inserted into the recessed part 16533a1, the space required for arranging the third protrusion 16532e can be suppressed and the size can be reduced. The protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside.

Next, referring to FIGS. 102 to 104, the sliding member 1573 in the seventeenth embodiment
2 will be explained. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is located upstream of the sensor device SE1 disposed on the downstream path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 140 has been described; In the seventeenth embodiment, a case will be described in which the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown as being transparent. In addition, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. The respective states are illustrated. In addition, FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) are similar to FIG. 17(
This corresponds to the cross sections of a) and FIG. 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment is
An upright wall 17532c1 is formed to protrude from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The standing wall 17532c1 has a tip thereof set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535, and the tip thereof is bent toward the front side.

The length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upper and lower sides are below the sensor device SE1 disposed on the second case member 535. The length is set to the position.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed in the second case member 535 and is formed through the opening 17535b in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second protrusion 17532c is inserted into the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-back direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-back direction (the driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upright wall 17532c1 is located downstream of the sensor device SE1, and the game Ball insertion can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 1
7532c1 is arranged on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole that detects the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, a game ball can be inserted therethrough.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player. 104(a) and 104(b) show the winning opening unit 500
FIG. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) are similar to FIGS. 20(a) and 20
Each corresponds to the cross section in (b). Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the longitudinal position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, similarly to the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forced into the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game balls entered from the second prize opening 140 are stagnated on the upper surface of the erected wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the top surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball fixed on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is brought into a state where it is constantly detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined period of time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store operator of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 that detects the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140, and the erected wall 17532c1 has a regulating position downstream from the sensor device SE1. At the same time, since the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, if the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 detects the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 continues beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, a rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is attached to the hub 812.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the projections 18812a1 are formed at different distances in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a.
Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment,
FIG. 105(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment has a protrusion 18812a1 that protrudes semispherically toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 disposed opposite to it. Have multiple pieces.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotation side) is directed to the second protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotational rear side of the first protrusion 18812a1). You can easily cause a collision.
Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, inner reel unit 810, and outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment,
Although the case has been described in which the side wall portion 881 of the storage unit 880 is formed into a plate-shaped body, a plurality of openings are formed in the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 106(a) and 12(b) show a decorative pattern display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment.
FIG. Note that in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the outer reel unit 82
A state in which 0 is transitioned (rotationally displaced) is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 106(b), an opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d extending in the left-right direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The forming angle of adjacent openings 19881d is
Spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and spokes 82 of the outer reel unit 820
The formation angle is set to be approximately the same as the formation angle of No. 2. Further, the circumferential opening dimension of the opening 19881d is set smaller than the circumferential width dimension of the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812)
c) can be placed next to the opening 19881d. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered by the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated, it is possible to suppress air from flowing in through the opening 19812c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at a circumferential position different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the air inflow path the shortest and reducing air resistance, air can easily flow into the inside of the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodation unit 880).

Therefore, when rotating the inner reel unit 810 to perform an effect that allows the player to see other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is restricted and the inner reel 811 is rotated. The display can be easily recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. It's easy to do.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the bulges 524L, 52 of the pair of left and right wing members 520L, 520R are
Although the case where the parts other than 4R are formed symmetrically has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projections 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side, and the wing members 520L, 520R may have the same shape. In this case, the wing member 520L
, 520R can be formed from the same parts, so by sharing the parts, the wing members 520L, 520R,
The manufacturing cost of 520R can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined portion 625a of the reflective member 625 is formed as a smooth surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved in a convex manner toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and can be made uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidities (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force (size, size, etc.) transmitted between one side and the other side may differ. (Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different; One side and the other side have different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in the connecting parts, etc.); One side and the other side are different. They may have different ease of displacement toward the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.), or may be a combination of these.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the component, the driving means 6
80U and the driving means 680D connect their higher rigidity side (lower rigidity side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (lower rigidity side).
high side). Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680
Each of D can create a state in which the side with high rigidity pushes the opponent (moves forward) and the side with low rigidity accepts the opponent (retreats). As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and placing a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may also be something that allows you to do so.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are different from each other is that , materials, etc.), connection states between component members (for example, number of connected parts, amount of wobbling of connected parts, etc.) are different, or combinations of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different, and the support manner of the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D is biased to one side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the upright wall 532c1 is formed so as to be able to slide inside the first case member 534, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the upright wall 532c1 may be projected from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L, 520R are opened by unauthorized means, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright wall 53
It is possible to suppress the game ball from being stagnated in front of 2c1). As a result, fraud by players can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the game ball is guided in the front-back direction by changing the side shape between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be disposed inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front and back direction by the attraction force of the magnets. This eliminates the need to narrow the distance between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, so it is possible to suppress the game ball from being pinched between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attraction force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attraction surface of the magnet. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments described above, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 has a plurality of protrusions 2.
Although the case where 812a1 and 18812a1 are formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. In this case, as in the second and eighteenth embodiments, airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves. As a result, the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 82
The outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned by sending air between the two opposing reels.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the variable prize winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slidable in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13, and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning hole 65a. It may be configured such that the ball is not allowed to enter, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 is extended to the front side of the game board 13 to allow the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 155. In this first control example, the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment (control related to the game of the pachinko machine 10, operation control of the variable display unit 80, light emission control of various lamps, etc.) related processing) will be explained. In this control example, by controlling the operations of the inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, and displacement member 670, the lottery results of special symbols are displayed to the player in various display operation modes. is controlled. Thereby, it is possible to provide players with a game that they will never get tired of.

In addition, in this control example, a double reel structure is provided in which the outer reel 821 is provided so as to cover the inner reel 811, and the inner (display surface of the inner reel 811) It has a transparent region 821a1 (see FIG. 109) that transmits the inside, and non-transparent regions 821a2 and 821a3 (see FIG. 109) that do not transmit the inside (the display surface of the inner reel 811). With this configuration, for example, the transparent area 821a1 of the outer reel 821 is placed at a position facing the display window 880 for making the combination of the third symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result visible to the player. By positioning the non-transparent areas 821a2 and 821a3 of the outer reel 821, the player can see the operating mode of the inner reel 811. can be made invisible.

With this configuration, a wide variety of reel displays can be performed in the area of the display window 880 whose size is limited due to the structure of the pachinko machine 10, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the outer reel 821, it is possible to create a state in which the operating mode of the inner reel 811 cannot be seen by the player. or when you want to display a specific symbol in a static state. To prevent a player from visually perceiving the operation content of the reel 811 when performing an operation (such as rotating the reel 811 at a speed of 1/3 of the speed of a normal production pattern). I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the reel display using the above-mentioned double reel structure, the lottery result of the special symbol is also notified to the player by a 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery results of the special symbols in more various display modes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is different from conventional gaming machines that display the lottery results of special symbols using a liquid crystal screen, and the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery results of special symbols by the manner in which the reels are stopped. It is composed of In such gaming machines, like conventional gaming machines, the LCD screen is used to display information other than the lottery results of special symbols, such as continuous effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) that increase the expectation of winning a jackpot as the number of consecutive symbols increases. Since there is no display area for informing the player of information indicating the number of times the continuous performance has been performed, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous performance. On the other hand, in this control example, by operating the displacement member 670 to vary the display area visible to the player, the process for the continuous performance (the number of times the continuous performance is executed) is notified to the player. It consists of Thereby, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not have a liquid crystal display device, it is possible for the player to easily understand the process of continuous performance.

Although this control example uses a configuration that notifies the player of the process of continuous performance by varying the display area of the reel display, other configurations may be used to notify the player of the process of continuous performance. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) will be changed depending on the number of times the continuous performance is performed, and the sound effect during reel operation will be changed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-described continuous performance is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is configured to gradually become narrower depending on the number of times the continuous performance is executed. With this configuration, the narrower the display area of the reel display, the higher the player's expectation of a jackpot, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. .

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 and narrowing the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of valid lines that display combinations of symbols to indicate the lottery results of special symbols) ), it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this first control example, the time (variable time) from when a special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is configured to vary depending on the gaming state that is set. Specifically, in gaming states where special symbol drawings are likely to be executed (time saving state, probability variable state), a short variable time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of special symbol drawings executed per unit time, and special In a gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to draw a symbol, the configuration is such that a long variable time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which a special symbol is not drawn (period in which the special symbol does not change). are doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is varied is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set (for example, 0.2 seconds). and execute a 7-segment display in which the speed at which the symbols displayed in the display area are varied is fast (for example, 0.05 seconds) in gaming states where short variation times are likely to be set (probability variation state, time saving state). It consists of As a result, even if multiple display methods with different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol will be reliably stopped and displayed after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Note that FIG. 107 differs from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that it includes additional configurations with reference numerals to facilitate explanation of this control example. , are different in that the signs are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 107, the variable display unit 80 includes a decorative symbol display device 800 and a 7-segment display section 1600, and is configured to be able to notify the player of the special symbol lottery results using different display methods. ing. The decorative pattern display device 800 is composed of a left rotation unit 800a, a middle rotation unit 800b, and a right rotation unit 800c, and each rotation unit 800a to 800c has a double reel structure (Fig. 32 reference). A display window 880 is formed in the center of the game board 13 to allow the player to visually recognize a part of the symbol (third symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the special symbol lottery result based on the combination of symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed within the display window 880. Hereinafter, the area within the display window 880, that is, the area visible to the player among the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800 will be referred to as a symbol display area (also simply referred to as a display area). ). Further, details of the symbols displayed in the double reel structure of each rotating unit 800a to 800c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

Next, the 7-segment display section 1600 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the display area of each rotating unit 800a to 800c, and is used as part of 7 segments for displaying predetermined identification information. Specifically, it is composed of a rectangle (6 segments) with one horizontal segment and two vertical segments so as to form six segments out of seven segments. Note that the detailed contents of the light emitting members constituting each segment are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 55), and therefore will be omitted.

In this first control example, the 7-segment display section 1600 includes a left 7-segment display section 1600a that covers the outer periphery of the left rotation unit 800a, a middle 7-segment display section 1600b that covers the outer periphery of the middle rotation unit 800b, and a right rotation unit 800b. A right 7-segment display section 1600c is provided to cover the outer periphery of the moving unit 800c, and each of the 7-segment display sections 1600a to 1600c is configured to be able to display three identification information (numbers) as a third symbol.

Note that one 7 segment (7 segments) is configured by combining the 6 segments of the 7 segment display section 1600 and the light emitting area 822 (see FIG. 109) displayed by the decorative pattern display device 800. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the display area for reel display and the display area for 7-segment display can be overlapped. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed within a limited space. Detailed display contents (display contents of the third symbol) using this 7-segment display section 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

Furthermore, an LED (lightning LED) 671 is disposed at the outer edge of the display window 880 (7-segment display section 1600) as a light emitting means capable of emitting light toward the display area of the reel display. The LEDs 671 are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display window 880, with a lightning bolt LED 671a on the lower left side of the display window 880 (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 107) and a lightning bolt LED 671b on the upper left side. , a lightning bolt LED 671c is provided on the lower right side, and a lightning bolt LED 671d is provided on the upper right side.

When these lightning bolt LEDs 671 emit light, highly directional light is irradiated towards a partial area of the display area of the reel display, and a composite pattern that is combined with the statically displayed pattern in the above-mentioned partial area is expressed. It is configured as follows. The detailed content of this composite pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(a).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the display contents of the display symbols (third symbols) that can be displayed by each of the rotating units 800a to 800c will be explained. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display symbols on the inner reel 811 of each rotation unit 800a to 800c, and FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing the display symbol on the inner reel 811 of each rotation unit 800a to 800c. It is a schematic diagram.

The left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure with an inner left reel 811a and an outer left reel 821a, and the middle rotation unit 800b has a double reel structure with an inner inner reel 811b and an outer left reel 821b. A heavy reel structure is configured, and the right rotation unit 800c has a double reel structure including an inner right reel 811c and an outer right reel 821c.

Here, a method of displaying a symbol (third symbol) using each of the rotation units 800a to 800c will be briefly explained using the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, the left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure including an inner left reel 811a and an outer left reel 821a, and a motor (not shown) serving as a driving source for each reel. is provided. Then, by passing a current in a specific direction to the motor, the reel rotates in the forward direction (the direction in which the reel rotates from top to bottom from the perspective of Figure 107), and by passing a current in the opposite direction to the specific direction, The reel is configured to rotate in the opposite direction (in the direction in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top as seen in FIG. 107).

Further, in this control example, a motor MPU (not shown) is provided as a drive control means for controlling the motor drive of each reel used in each rotation unit 800a to 800c. This motor MPU is used to variably set the rotational direction and rotational speed of each motor, and executes drive control corresponding to various variable displays executed based on the lottery results of special symbols. . In this way, by managing the motor drive control of each reel used in each rotation unit 800a to 800c by one motor MPU, it is possible to perform operation control that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, the symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 will be explained. FIG. 108 shows a display surface member (display tape) having a display pattern (display pattern printed on the display surface) that can be displayed on each inner reel (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c). FIG. In this control example, a display surface on a loop is formed by pasting the display surface member described above along the outer peripheral surface of each inner reel.

Therefore, for example, when the left inner reel 811a is rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the displayed symbols move from top to bottom in the display window 880 (see FIG. 107)), the images printed on the display surface member The displayed symbols are displayed within the display window 880 while changing from the bottom to the top. Then, after the display pattern printed on the top of the display surface member (the top in the display of FIG. 108, the blue 7 pattern R1 in the case of the left inner reel 811a), the next one is printed on the bottom of the surface member. The displayed symbol (lowest in the display in FIG. 108, part of the combination symbol R3 in the case of the inner left reel 811a) is displayed.

Next, the display symbols printed on the display surface member of each inner reel will be specifically explained. The left inner reel 811a of the left rotation unit 800a has a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, which is the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 120(b))). A blue 7 symbol R1 corresponding to the symbol combination to indicate winning, a red 7 symbol R2 corresponding to the symbol combination to indicate to the player that he has won the jackpot, and a specific display area. The left combination symbol R3a, which is a part of the combination symbol R3 for which the execution condition of the special performance can be satisfied when stopped and displayed, and the lottery result of the special symbol are results that are disadvantageous to the player (for example, a loss). A danger symbol R4 corresponding to a combination of symbols for indicating is printed on at least the reel display surface.

The blue 7 symbols R1 and the red 7 symbols R2 are symbols printed on each inner reel 811, and when they are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on each inner reel 811 (when they are stopped and displayed in a row), This indicates that you have won a special jackpot. In this control example, it is possible to set multiple jackpots that differ in the amount of benefits given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to set a plurality of jackpots that are different in the amount of benefits given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls and the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game ends). In this case, a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating that the blue 7 symbol R1 has won the jackpot is displayed (blue 7 hit). In addition, when a jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot won, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the red 7 symbol R2 has won the jackpot is stopped (red 7 hit).

In other words, if a blue 7 is won, the player can be notified in advance (before the jackpot game starts) that he or she has won an advantageous jackpot, so the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. You can make it happen. In addition, in the case of a red 7 hit, the player is only notified that they have won the jackpot, so the details of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game are It is possible to make a player play a jackpot game while making him or her expect an advantage.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 stops the blue 7 winning based on the fluctuation pattern command that includes information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery output from the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by the player operating the frame button 22 which is the operating means, the player can determine whether to display the winning red 7 or stop displaying the winning red 7. It may be configured such that the percentage of stop display of blue 7 when a condition (winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player) under which the game can be stopped and displayed is satisfied. Note that the variable ratio here means that the stop display ratio for blue 7 is 0%, that is, the stop display for blue 7 is not displayed, or the stop display ratio for blue 7 is 100%, that is, blue 7. This concept includes a state in which a win is always stopped and displayed.

The combination symbol R3 is not a special symbol to indicate a jackpot win, but is a suggestive symbol that can suggest and notify the expectation level of a jackpot win in combination with the lightning bolt LED 671 disposed in the variable display unit 80. It is. A specific explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 114(a), but only when the combination symbol R3a on the inner left reel 811a and the combination symbol R3b on the inner right reel 811c are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, The special effective line is configured to be set as an effective line for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special effective line is configured to be easily set when a jackpot is won.

With this configuration, the symbol (blue 7 symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) for indicating jackpot winning is displayed in a stopped state on a predetermined active line in response to the variable display using the inner reel 811. In addition to the game in which the player watches to see whether the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, it is possible to play the game in which the player watches to see whether the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. can.

In addition, in this control example, the symbol printed on the inner reel 811 (combination symbol R3) and the lightning bolt LED 671 arranged in the variable display unit 80 can be combined to suggest and notify the expectation level of winning a jackpot. It is configured so that it can be done. In addition, the display mode of the combination pattern R3 and the shape (light emitting mode) of the lightning bolt LED 671 are adjusted so that the combination pattern R3 and the lightning bolt LED 671 are integrally expressed when the combination pattern R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. It is structured so that there is a relationship between the two. Thereby, the player can visually understand that the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The danger symbol R4 is a symbol printed only on the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c, and is configured as a suggestive symbol to indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot, similar to the above-mentioned combination symbol R3. . When this danger symbol R4 is stopped and displayed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c in a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement one row above), and the chance symbol R5 is stopped and displayed on the middle inner reel 811b, a specific The variable display mode will be executed. That is, unlike the combination symbol R3, the danger symbol R4 is a suggestive symbol that can suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot using only the symbols printed on the inner reel 811.

In addition, in this control example, the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed will result in the stop display of the third symbol to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, and during the variation time of the special symbol. When a stop display is made (including a temporary stop display that shakes to a degree that allows the player to recognize that it is a stop display), a stop display of a suggested symbol to suggest the jackpot expectation of the special symbol being executed. becomes.

In this way, when the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) during the special symbol fluctuation period, the symbols that indicate the lottery results of jackpot symbols (for example, blue 7 symbol R1, red 7 symbol R2) are stopped and displayed. (Temporary stop display), but because the structure is configured to stop display (temporary stop display) the suggested symbols (for example, combination symbol R3, danger symbol R4), the inner reel 811 during the special symbol fluctuation period. It is possible to prevent the stop display (temporary stop display) from being mistaken as the stop display of the third symbol.

Here, both the stop display of the third symbol and the stop display of the suggested symbol are set based on the special symbol lottery result executed by the main controller 110. Specifically, it is set based on the winning/failure lottery result of the special symbol and the result of the variable lottery (variable pattern lottery) of the special symbol, so any symbol indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes a pattern for.

A total of 10 display symbols are printed on the left inner reel 811a. Here, since the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate once in 2 seconds, the left inner reel 811a serves as a display means configured to change the displayed symbols every 0.2 seconds. In this control example, each of the left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, and right inner reel 811c of the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate at the same variable speed (2 seconds per revolution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation speeds of the inner reels may be made different. In addition, the time (acceleration period) required for each inner reel to reach a specific fluctuating speed (2 seconds per round) after rotation may be made different, or The time required from the rotating state (2 seconds) to the stop display (deceleration period) may be varied. Furthermore, the timing at which each inner reel starts rotating may be made different.

By rotating each inner reel in various rotation patterns in this way, the player is reminded that there is some kind of rule between the rotation pattern of each inner reel and the lottery result of the special symbol. This can prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation (rotation) control and stop control of the left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, and right inner reel 811c are executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation. , without being limited to this, for example, among the symbols that were stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol variation (third symbol), the stop position (stop display mode) of some symbols may be different from that of the current special symbol variation. If it is determined that the stop display mode is the same as the stop display mode that shows the fluctuation result (lottery result), only the remaining inner reels start rotating without rotating the inner reel in which the stop display mode is displayed. It may be configured as follows.

Similarly, a total of 10 display symbols are printed on the inner right reel 811c. As for the type of display symbol being printed, when the symbol displayed on the inner left reel 811a is stopped and displayed in a specific display area instead of the left combination symbol R3a, the execution condition for the special performance can be met. The difference is that a right combination pattern R3b, which is a part of the combination pattern R3, is provided, and the rest is the same. The reference numerals and explanations for the same display patterns will be omitted.

In this control example, the right inner reel 811c is normally configured to stop rotating after the left inner reel 811a stops rotating. Therefore, when the right inner reel 811c is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot (whether or not it is in a reach state).

Finally, the symbols displayed on the inner reel 811b will be explained. In this control example, when performing a variable display for showing the lottery results of special symbols using the inner reel unit 810, the inner reel 811b is configured to be stopped last. Therefore, for the display symbols printed on the above-mentioned inner left reel 811a and inner right reel 811c, display symbols for indicating that the jackpot lottery result is a loss or a specific variable display mode are executed. The difference is that a display pattern is added to notify the user of the situation. The other displayed symbols are the same as those of the inner left reel 811a or the inner right reel 811c described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, when notifying the player of the special symbol lottery result using the three inner reels, the reel drive is stopped in the order of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. It is configured to allow Then, on the stopped inner left reel 811a, inner right reel 811c, and middle inner reel 811b, among the plurality of display symbols stopped and displayed in an area (display area) visible to the player from the display window 880, a specific display symbol is displayed. The lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player based on the combination of symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the area (valid line).

In this way, by stopping and displaying the three inner reels in a predetermined order, the player can easily understand which inner reel will be stopped and displayed next. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand. Note that the reels may be stopped in a different order only when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a special symbol jackpot is won) is satisfied. This makes it possible to notify the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot when an action different from normal is performed. In addition, in order for a player to identify whether or not the reel operation is different from normal, it is necessary to understand the normal reel operation. It can create interest in the content of the action.

In addition, by using a configuration in which the three inner reels are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, when two reels among the left inner reel 811a, right inner reel 811c, and middle inner reel 811b stop, the stopped two reels Check whether the display symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped in a specific area for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to one reel (hereinafter referred to as reach state). It is possible to notify players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the production effect during variable display, the motor MPU may be configured to perform different rotational operations for each of the inner left reel 811a, the inner right reel 811c, and the inner middle reel 811b. For example, after three reels are rotated forward and a reach state is reached, only the remaining reels are controlled to rotate in the reverse direction, thereby informing the player that the reach state has been reached in an easy-to-understand manner. Or, if the current fluctuation display is in the reach state (there is a high possibility that it will be in the reach state), all the inner reels should be rotated in reverse from the point at which the rotation of the three inner reels is executed. It may be configured such that the player can easily predict the lottery result of the current special symbol at the timing when the variable display is executed (when none of the reels are stopped).

As explained above, in this control example, as shown in FIG. By rotating the inner reel 811a, the inner middle reel 811b, and the inner right reel 811c, the display symbols displayed in the player's viewing area (inside the display window 880) can be changed.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 110, but in this control example, an active line is set in the display area where the reel 811 is displayed, and on the active line are blue 7 symbols R1 and red 7 symbols R2. , BAR symbols are arranged in a line, a jackpot game is executed. Further, when the combination pattern R3, special pattern R6, etc. stops at a specific position, a special effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that a jackpot game or special performance will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the display symbols are arranged at equal intervals, but the display symbols may be arranged at uneven intervals. Specifically, there is a section where many display symbols are printed to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot), and a section where most of the display symbols are printed. It is also possible to configure the display symbols so that the intervals between the displayed symbols are unequal by providing sections in which there are no symbols. This allows the player to predict the game result with a vague sense of in what section the rotation of the inner reel 811 will stop.

Next, the symbols displayed on the outer reel 821 will be explained with reference to FIG. 109. The display surface of the outer reel 821 used in this control example is roughly divided into three sections. Here, the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be explained using the left outer reel 821a included in the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, this control example employs a double reel structure, and the outer reel 821 is disposed to cover the display surface of the inner reel 811.

The contents of the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be explained with reference to the left outer reel 821a.The left first region (transparent region) 821a1 formed of a transparent member whose interior can be transmitted through, and the segment display section 1600 are combined. A second left area (seg area) 821a2 in which one 7 segments are formed, and a third left area (presentation area) in which a special display mode for notifying the lottery results of special symbols on the display surface of the outer reel 821 is formed. display area) 821a3.

As described above, the outer reel 821 is formed of a transparent member that allows the interior of only the first region among the respective regions (first to third regions) to be visually recognized. In other words, in the double reel structure of this control example, when the inner reel 811 is used to perform a variable display to show the lottery result of a special symbol, the first area of the display surface of the outer reel 821 is placed in the display window 880. The motor MPU controls the drive so that the motor stops at the corresponding position.

With this configuration, the driving content (variable display mode) of the inner reel (inner reel 811) of the double reel structure can be easily viewed by the player from the display window 880. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 109, a left light emitting region 822a is formed at the vertical center position of the second left region 821a2, spanning the entire width of the left outer reel 821a, and is combined with the left 7-segment display section 1600a. Thus, it is configured to form one seven segments (see FIG. 110(b)). This left light-emitting region 822a is controlled to emit light in conjunction with the light-emitting display of the 7-segment display section 1600, and has the same color as the six segments of the 7-segment display section 1600 (including errors that are difficult for the player to distinguish). concept) and is configured to emit light. Specifically, it is configured to transmit the same luminescent color as the luminescent color of the 7-segment display section 1600 irradiated from the backlight unit 830 (see FIG. 31) of the decorative pattern display device 800.

In addition, the portion of the second left region 821a2 other than the left light emitting region 822a is formed of a black non-transparent material, and the player can use the left inner The reel 811a is configured so that it cannot be visually recognized. Thereby, as a display mode of the decorative symbol display device 800, by positioning the outer reel 821 in the second area, a variable display using 7 segments (7 segment display) can be performed.

In this control example, when the 7-segment display is executed, during the special symbol fluctuation time, each of the 7 segments is controlled to light up and blink at high speed, and the 7-segment display is stopped. is configured to perform a dynamic display that indicates that the In addition, the system is configured to control the 7-segment display during dynamic display (7-segment display that repeatedly lights up and blinks at high speed) so as not to mislead the user into thinking that it is a specific symbol.

To explain more specifically, in this control example, by controlling the seven segments to light up one by one, a dynamic display is created in which one lit segment appears to be moving in a circle. It is configured to do this. This allows the player to easily understand that the current dynamic display period is in progress, and also allows the 7-segment display during the dynamic display period to display special symbol lottery results. It is possible to prevent the image from being mistakenly recognized as a pattern.

That is, in this control example, a 7-segment display section 1600 is arranged around the decorative pattern display device 800, and a pattern (third The type of variable display mode in which the symbols) are displayed in a variable manner is configured to be variable. Specifically, it is possible to easily switch between a variable display mode using the inner reel 811, a variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and a variable display mode using 7 segments, and each variable display mode is Displayed areas can overlap. Therefore, it is possible to provide various variable display modes within a limited predetermined area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109, in the third left area 821a3, a part of a pattern (a pattern imitating a "7") for indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot is printed. When the motor MPU controls the drive to stop at a position corresponding to the display window 880, the left special display mode 823a printed on the left outer reel 821a and the middle special display printed on the middle outer reel 821b are displayed. The special display mode 823b and the right special display mode 823c printed on the right outer reel 821c are combined so that a special display mode imitating "7" is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol using a display symbol that occupies most of the display area in the display window 880, thereby giving an impact to the player. I can do it. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when executing a variable display for notifying the lottery results of special symbols using the outer reels 821, the symbol rows of each outer reel 821 are aligned ( In the state shown in FIG. 109), the configuration is such that control is executed to rotate each outer reel 821 in synchronization.

The symbols displayed on the outer reel 821 have been explained above with reference to the left outer reel 821a, but the symbols displayed on the middle outer reel 821b and the right outer reel 821c are the same as the left outer reel 821a (in the special symbol display mode). The only difference is the design), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the contents of the variable display executed by the variable display unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the variable display contents when the normal state is set as the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable display using the inner reel 811 in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 110(a), normally, the display window 880 is configured so that three display symbols of each inner reel (left inner reel 811a to right inner reel 811c) are displayed vertically. , Display symbols stopped and displayed in the upper part as valid lines to show the lottery results of special symbols (inner left reel 811a is blue 7 symbol R1, inner reel 811b is blank symbol R7, inner right reel 811c is right combination The first line S1 with the symbol R3b) as the active line, and the display symbols stopped and displayed in the middle part (the left inner reel 811a is the red 7 symbol R2, the middle inner reel 811b is the special symbol R6, and the right inner reel 811c is the blue 7 symbol) The second line S2 has the symbol R1) as the active line, and the display symbols stopped and displayed at the bottom (left inner reel 811a is a bar symbol, middle inner reel 811b is a blank symbol R7, right inner reel 811c is a right combination symbol R3b) ) is formed as a third line S3 as an effective line.

Furthermore, a first diagonal line V1 whose effective lines are the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, the middle stage of the middle inner reel 811b, and the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c, the upper stage of the left inner reel 811a, and the middle inner reel 811b A second diagonal line V2 is formed whose effective lines are the middle stage and the lower stage of the inner right reel 811c.

That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the display symbols are stopped and displayed on the five active lines (S1 to S3, and V1, V2) formed on the display surface of the variable display unit 80. The lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player based on the combination of . Furthermore, in this control example, the number of target valid lines is configured to vary depending on the stop position of the displayed symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the upper position of the inner left reel 811a constitutes a part of two effective lines (first line S1 and second diagonal line V2), and the inner left reel 811a The middle position of is configured as a part of one effective line (second line S2). As a result, when the first inner reel (for example, the left inner reel 811a) of each inner reel stops, it is possible to determine at what position the next inner reel (for example, the right inner reel 811c) will stop. It is possible to have the player play the game while predicting whether it is desirable. In addition, if some display symbols that correspond to a combination of display symbols for indicating a lottery result advantageous to the player stop at a stop position that forms part of a plurality of active lines, then This can increase the player's expectations for a jackpot since the player can reach a reach state.

Next, the variable display contents when the time saving state (variable probability state) is set as the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 110(b). FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 during the time saving state. In this control example, when the time saving state (probability variable state) is set, it is configured so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the normal state is likely to be set as a variation pattern of the special symbol.

In a time saving state (probability variable state) in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be set, a 7-segment display is executed as a variation display to show the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, even if a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol can be reliably stopped and displayed after the predetermined variation time has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), during the time saving state, the left second area (seg area) 821a2 of the left outer reel 821a, the middle second area (seg area) 821b2 of the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c. By positioning the right second area (seg area) 821c2 so as to correspond to the display window 880, a left 7-segment display section 1600a, a middle 7-segment display section 1600b, and a right 7-segment display section are displayed in the display area. Three 7-segments of 1600c are formed. Figure 110(b) shows a state in which all areas that can be lit in the 7-segment display are lit, but each 7-segment display has a display mode that imitates numbers "0" to "9". It becomes possible.

When the special symbol lottery result is started during this time saving state, each of the 7 segments will be dynamically displayed, and after a predetermined period (variable time set in the variable pattern) has passed, the special symbol lottery result will be displayed in a display mode. The displayed symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in this control example, a display pattern in which the light emitting area 822 is made to emit light is easily displayed as a display pattern to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

To explain more specifically, this control example is configured so that display patterns imitating 10 types of numbers from "0" to "9" can be displayed as 7-segment display patterns, and the lottery results of special symbols are If the number is off, the display pattern ("2", "3", "4", "5", "6") in which the light-emitting area 822 is made to emit light among the display patterns imitating the 10 kinds of numbers mentioned above is selected. , "8", "9") are configured to be easily set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the displayed symbols that are stopped and displayed.

In other words, among the seven segments used in the 7-segment display, one segment (light-emitting area 822) formed using the outer reel 821 has a display mode when lit (light-emitting) compared to the other six segments. However, since the mode when the light is off (when not emitting light) is different from the other six segments, the light emission when not emitting light is different from the other six segments. It is possible to prevent the area 822 from being mistakenly recognized as forming a part of a display symbol for indicating the lottery result of a special symbol.

To explain in more detail, in this control example, the second area of the outer reel 821 is divided into an area where the light emitted from the backlight unit 830 is transmitted and an area where the light is not transmitted, and the area where the light is transmitted is defined as the area where the light is transmitted. The light-emitting region 822 is formed using the light-emitting region 822, and the other regions are formed with a non-transmissive member (black member) for not transmitting light. The light emitting area 822 is made of a white material that allows light from the backlight unit 830 to pass through.

Therefore, the light emitting region 822 is a region formed of a white member surrounded by a black member. As a result, even when the backlight unit 830 is not lit, the non-transparent light emitting area 822 can be easily recognized, and as a result, it forms part of the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern. This can prevent the user from being mistakenly recognized as being present.

Then, using these three 7 segments, a variable display is performed to show the lottery results of the special symbol to the player, and after a predetermined period of variable time has elapsed, a variable display to show the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. The displayed symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, after the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the time saving state is set until the number of drawings of special symbols reaches 100, and the time saving state is set as the gaming state. When the number of drawings of the special symbol that is executed reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the remaining number of drawings of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches the predetermined number, the remaining number of drawings of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches the predetermined number, the remaining number of drawings of the special symbol (remaining drawing It is configured to display the number of times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 111(a), the display contents of the third symbol displayed on the variable display device unit 80 during time saving (during time saving state) will be explained. In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the third symbol is variably displayed using the segment display section 1600 of the segment display device 600. FIG. 111(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol during time saving. As shown in FIG. 111(a), the variation results are shown in a display format using a 7-segment display of symbols. In FIG. 111(a), "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display section 1600a, "5" on the middle 7-segment display section 1600b, and "6" on the right 7-segment display section 1600c. In this manner, the display mode using seven segments displays the symbols in a variable manner by irradiating the light provided in the backlight unit, so it can also correspond to a variation pattern with a short variation time.

Here, the display of the number of remaining time reductions will be explained with reference to FIG. 111(b). FIG. 111(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed during the time reduction state. . As shown in FIG. 111(b), the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the middle 7 segment display section 1600b. In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions becomes less than five, the player is notified of the number of remaining time reductions using 7 segments. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the period until the end of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state), so that the player may feel uncomfortable if the time-saving state ends suddenly. You can restrain yourself from giving away.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, first, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the remaining time shortened number is displayed. It is configured so that Then, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7-segment that displays the remaining time reduction number. It consists of

With this configuration, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the number of remaining time reductions can be displayed differently. It is possible to reliably notify the number of times.

Furthermore, in this control example, after the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, there is no need to display the remaining time shortening number display indicating the remaining time shortening number, that is, if the special symbol wins the jackpot. In this case, the display pattern is configured to be set regardless of the number of remaining time shortening times that will be displayed next, so there is no limit to how the display pattern can be set to indicate that you have won the jackpot. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the displayed symbols that are stopped and displayed according to the privilege given by the won jackpot (the size of the number of prize balls and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game).

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the remaining time reduction count is displayed using the middle 7 segment display section 1600b. The number of remaining time reductions may be displayed using the segment display section 1600a or the right 7-segment display section 1600c. In this case, for example, if the left 7-segment display section 1600a that is first stopped and displayed is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game can be played while knowing in advance the number of remaining time reductions that will be displayed next. By doing so, if the same number as the number of remaining time reductions that will be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol to show the special symbol lottery result on the left 7-segment display section 1600a, the current lottery result is a jackpot. This can be made known in advance. Furthermore, the 7-segment display section 1600 on which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time are displayed within one variable display period (including the symbol confirmation time). The display is configured to display the short remaining time for a fixed period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, for example, if the set special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds, the special symbol will be displayed for 1.5 seconds, and then for 0.5 seconds, regardless of whether or not the remaining time shortening display is executed. However, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not to display the short remaining time, and if the short remaining time is not displayed, the short remaining time is displayed. In contrast to executing a special symbol variation, if you are in a state where a short remaining time display is to be performed, a 0.5 second shortening variation is executed as a special symbol variation, and then a 0.5 second short remaining time display is performed. is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to perform both the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time within one special symbol variable display period.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time are both executed within one special symbol variable display period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple It may be configured to display the number of remaining time reductions so as to straddle the special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, a special symbol fluctuation display is executed for a certain period of time regardless of the set fluctuation time, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time is shortened. It is best to set this as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbols can be made constant, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified, so the type of variable display data can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for displaying the short remaining time count is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the special symbol fluctuating display is executed and the set fluctuating time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0 .5 seconds), it is preferable to configure the remaining time shortening number display to be executed over the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. With this configuration, the player can reliably grasp the number of remaining time reductions. However, in this case, since the special symbol fluctuations will start while the remaining time shortening number display is being executed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that a new special symbol fluctuation has started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area that is not used for displaying the number of shortened remaining times (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by changing the light emitting color of the display mode of the short remaining time count display (the display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111(b)), it is possible to notify the player that a special symbol change has started. It is good to configure it as follows. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a new special symbol variation has started in an easy-to-understand manner while displaying the number of shortened remaining times.

When executing the above-described process, specifically, the following configuration may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113. First, a variation time extraction means extracts a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a variation of the third symbol within the variation time of the special symbol variation. A setting means for setting a third symbol variation display time for displaying a display and a remaining time shortening display time for displaying a remaining time shortening number; a third symbol variation display time set by the setting means; and a variation time extracting means for extracting the third symbol variation display time. a calculation means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times); a lower limit determination means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculation means is less than or equal to a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second); If it is determined that the time is below the lower limit fluctuation time, a continuation flag is set on to indicate that the display of the number of short remaining time periods will not end within the current fluctuation pattern period.

This continuation flag is configured to be set off at the timing when the display of the short remaining time count ends, and when the continuation flag is set to on, that is, when the short remaining time count display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new symbol variation will be executed while the remaining time shortening number of times is being displayed.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for displaying the short remaining time, and even if the shortest time is set among the plurality of different times, the display of the short remaining time will not be displayed during the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the process will not end within the specified time. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the third symbol fluctuation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when displaying the remaining time shortening number of times and when not displaying the remaining time shortening. When displaying the number of times, the third symbol variation display time may be configured to be more likely to be set to be shorter than when displaying the number of times.

In addition, in this control example, the special symbol fluctuation time includes a period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (design fluctuation period) and a period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure may be such that the symbol variation period and the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol are controlled separately. In this case, for example, if the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol confirmation period, and the third symbol fluctuation display time is set longer than the symbol fluctuation period, or the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be longer than the symbol confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time short display cannot be executed during the symbol fluctuation period, this is to indicate that it will not end within the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to on.

In this control example, when performing a variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 (a variable display using 7 segments), the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be varied while changing a display mode that is different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a display mode in which only one segment out of seven segments is lit). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display section 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, if a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of the light, the game This makes it possible to prevent situations where the person may be misunderstood.

Furthermore, as a variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600, there is a high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed, and a high-speed variable display period that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and a display mode different from the third symbol is variably displayed during the high-speed fluctuation display period, and a symbol display mode showing the third symbol is variably displayed during the low-speed fluctuation display period. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation, and also to prevent the third symbol from suddenly stopping. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the contents of the variable display using the variable display of the inner reel 811 and the variable display of the segment display section 1600 will be explained. In this control example, as described above, the variable display of the third symbol is executed using the inner reel 811, the variable display of the third symbol is executed using the outer reel 821, and the segment display section 1600 is used. It is configured to be able to perform a variable display of the third symbol to be executed, and furthermore, in correspondence with one special symbol variable display, the above-mentioned plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, segment display 1600) so that a variable display (mixed variable display) of the third symbol can be executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the above-described mixed fluctuation display is more likely to be executed than when it is not a jackpot. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of devices capable of displaying the third symbol in a variable manner, players can expect that the variable display of the third symbol (mixed variable display) will be executed using a plurality of devices. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a special symbol jackpot using a gorgeous presentation (mixed variable display).

FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during a mixed variation display (special reach 1) using the inner reel 811 and the segment display section 1600. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but when special reach 1 is set as the variable display mode of the third symbol, first a variable display (normal variable display) that rotates the inner reel 811 is executed. and is temporarily stopped (including a slight oscillation state that makes the player think that it has stopped) at the combination of the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a jackpot (win). Thereafter, the displacement member 670 is varied to a position (fourth position) that completely covers the display surface of the inner reel 811, and when the displacement member 670 is again varied to the initial position (first position), the variable display unit 80 The presentation mode shown in 112 is displayed.

In the performance mode shown in FIG. 112, the third symbol indicating "7" is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display section 1600 and the right 7-segment display section 1600c, and the inner reel 811b moves in the direction of the arrow (from top to bottom). It is rotating towards. In this state, the left outer reel 821a and the right outer reel 821c are controlled so that the second area corresponding to the 7-segment display section 1600 (the area where the inner reel 811 is not visible to the player) is located within the display window 880. , only the middle and outer reels 821b are controlled so that the first area where the inner reel 811 is visible to the player is located within the display window 880.

In this way, by performing different operation controls depending on the performance mode performed on the three outer reels 821, a mixed fluctuation display can be performed. Then, on the inner reel 811b, a third symbol imitating a "7" is displayed in a stopped state in one of the display areas displayed in the display window 880, indicating that the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot. Notify the player.

In other words, according to the production mode shown in FIG. 112, even if the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the inner reel 811b, the jackpot will be won. Since a performance (variable display) is executed, it is possible to clearly inform the player that a performance with a high probability of winning a jackpot is being executed.

Note that for the performance mode shown in FIG. 112, it may be configured such that only the corresponding displacement member 670 (middle displacement member 670b) is varied so as to vary the display area of the middle inner reel 811b, or A third symbol imitating a "7" displayed on the segment display section 1600 is configured to emit red or blue light, and the color of the third symbol on the inner reel 811b indicating that the player has won the jackpot is limited. It's okay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the variable display contents using the outer reel 821 will be explained. In this control example, a special reach 2 effect in which the outer reel 821 is rotated is configured to be executable as the effect during the variable display using the inner reel 811. This special reach 2 performance is a performance in which the left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, and right outer reel 821c that constitute the outer reel 821 are rotated in synchronization with the symbols aligned.

FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of special reach 2. As shown in FIG. 113(a), while the inner reel 811 is rotating at high speed in the forward direction, the outer reel 821 slowly rotates in the forward direction (1/3 the rotation speed of the inner reel 811), An effect is executed in which the special display mode 823 is gradually displayed in the display area within the display window 880. The third area where this special display mode 823 is printed is a non-transparent area where the inner reel 811 cannot be seen, so depending on the rotation status of the outer reel 821, the display area of the inner reel 811 gradually narrows, and the outer reel 821 When the symbol is stopped and displayed completely covering the inner reel 811, a display symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed as shown in FIG. 113(b).

In FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), while the inner reel 811 is rotating at high speed in the forward direction, the outer reel 821 is slowly rotated in the forward direction to increase the rotational momentum of the inner reel 811. In this example, the special display modes (823a, 823b, 823c) displayed in the third area (821a3, 821b3, 821c3) of the outer reel 821 are rotated in conjunction with each other so as to be pushed out, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the inner reel 811 and the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 may be configured to be opposite directions. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the inner reel 811 is rotating at a faster speed than before.

Furthermore, although FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b) show an example in which the outer reel 821 is driven in one direction at a constant rotational speed, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 113(a), The rotation direction of the outer reel 821 is controlled to be in the opposite direction (the opposite direction to the forward direction) from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured to continue rotating. In this case, after passing the state shown in FIG. 113(b), the speed at which the state shown in FIG. 113(a) shifts (rotates) to the state shown in FIG. 113(b) Again, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the speed at which the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is reached is faster. As a result, it is possible to relatively lengthen the period during which the special display mode appears to be stopped and displayed within the display window 880.

In addition, in this control example, as explained using FIG. 113, rotation is performed in a state where each reel (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel 821c) constituting the outer reel 821 is aligned. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the inner reel 811 may be configured to be driven separately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the content of the special reach 3 effect (pseudo fluctuation effect) will be explained. FIG. 114(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative pattern display device in the pseudo-variation performance. In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the fluctuating display period) in which the display symbol for showing the result of one lottery of special symbols is dynamically displayed, it appears as if multiple lottery results are being displayed. It is configured to perform a pseudo-fluctuation effect that looks like this.

This pseudo-fluctuation performance is configured such that during one dynamic display period, a re-fluctuation performance is executed multiple times in which the displayed symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) and then fluctuated again. It is configured such that the more the number of times this re-fluctuation performance is executed, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using a liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation performances (the number of pseudo-sequences) executed during the pseudo-variation performance on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects performed during the pseudo-variation effect to the player. There was a problem in that it was difficult to notify the number of pseudo consecutive runs in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is varied every time the re-variation performance is executed, thereby informing the player of the number of times the re-variation performance has been executed. This makes it possible to provide games that are easy for players to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be varied so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 becomes narrower each time the re-variation performance is executed, and each time the re-variation performance is executed. , the number of effective lines within the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the effective lines that the player is forced to look at, so it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the process in which the combination of display symbols that corresponds to a jackpot is stopped and displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 114(a), the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a displacement member 670. Further, lightning bolt LEDs 671, which are light emitting means composed of LED lamps, are arranged at the four corners of the variable display unit 80, and a first lightning bolt LED 671a is arranged at the lower left side of the variable display unit 80, and a second lightning bolt LED 671a is arranged at the upper left side of the variable display unit 80. An LED 671b, a third lightning bolt LED 671c on the upper right side, and a fourth lightning bolt LED 671d on the lower right side are arranged, respectively. In this control example, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at the corresponding position of each lightning bolt LED 671, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5, which are special effective lines, are formed, and the fifth special line L5 It is configured such that when the special symbol R6 (a symbol imitating a black star) stops, a performance (so-called pseudo fluctuation performance) is executed in which each inner reel 811 rotates again.

Specifically, the rotation (fluctuation) of each inner reel 811 is started in response to the variation of the special symbols, and the combination symbols R3a are stopped at the upper and lower rows of the left inner reel 811a, and then the upper row of the right inner reel 811c. When the combination symbol R3b stops at the lower stage, the four lightning bolt LEDs 671 light up, and the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed. Then, in this state, the rotating speed of the inner reel 811b gradually decreases, and when the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5, the predetermined symbol R6 is displayed on the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5. The specific display symbol is now stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114(a)), and the displacement member 670 is varied in the direction of narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811 (see FIG. 114(b)). Each inner reel 811 fluctuates (rotates) again (executes the first pseudo fluctuation effect).

When the first pseudo-variation effect is executed, the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes narrower than usual due to the displacement member 670, so the number of effective lines of the display symbol is reduced to 5 lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2) to three lines (see FIG. 114(b)). In this control example, displacement members 670 are disposed above and below the variable display unit 80, and each of them variably operates to cover the display area of the inner reel 811, thereby narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811. Because of this configuration, the effective lines in the left and right direction (fourth line S4, fifth line S5) formed in the display area during the first pseudo-variation performance are different from the first line S1 to third line S3. formed in position.

Specifically, a fourth line S4 is formed between the first line S1 and the second line S2 (see FIG. 110(a)), and a fourth line S4 is formed between the second line S2 and the third line S3 (see FIG. 110(a)). ), a fifth line S5 is formed between them. In this way, by varying the position where the active line of the display symbol is formed in accordance with the size of the display area set in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the display area of the inner reel 811 is variable, the game The display pattern can be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is easy for a person to understand.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the reel MPU 114a that controls the drive of the inner reel 811 receives a command including information indicating the currently set effective line type from the audio lamp control device 113, and uses the received information to Based on this, the stop position of the displayed symbol is controlled. Therefore, in a configuration in which the position (vertical position) at which the effective line of the display symbol is formed can be varied, the display symbol can be stopped and displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition to the above-described configuration, for example, a detection means (sensor) for detecting the actual variable position of the displacement member 670 is provided, and the reel MPU 114a determines the formation position of the effective line based on the detection result of the detection means. It may be configured to determine the stopping position of the displayed symbol. With this configuration, the number of commands (amount of information) output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and in order to determine the actual position of the displacement member 670, the displacement Even when the member 670 is not operating normally (failure), the display pattern can be stopped in an appropriate display manner.

In addition, in this control example, when the size of the display area is changed by changing the displacement member 670 during the pseudo-variation performance, the formation position of the effective line of the display symbol is changed according to the size of the display area. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the displacement member 670 is at the initial position (see FIG. 114(a)), that is, normally, the effective lines are 5 lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2 ( (See FIG. 110(a)) In the state in which the lines are formed, only the effective line formation position may be variably set so that the second line S2 and the third line S3 become effective lines.

Returning to FIG. 114(b), the explanation will be continued. During the first pseudo variation performance (special reach 3), a display area is formed in which a maximum of two display symbols (see FIG. 108) printed on each inner reel 811 can be visually recognized. In this state, it is not possible to form an effective line in the diagonal direction, so a part of two effective lines (fourth line S4, fifth effective line S5) is formed on the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c. The position is set as the stop position of the displayed symbol. The inner reel 811b has the position where the display symbol stops, in addition to the position forming part of the two active lines (fourth line S4, fifth active line S5) mentioned above, and the position forming the fifth special line L5. Set as location.

In other words, during the first pseudo fluctuation performance, the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c execute a variable display (2-frame variation) to stop and display the displayed symbols at two positions, and the middle inner reel 811b displays the displayed symbols. It is configured to perform a variable display (3-frame variation) for stopping and displaying at three positions.

In this way, even if the display area of each inner reel 811 is the same size, by varying the number of positions at which the displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to vary the variable display mode for each inner reel 811. , it is possible to provide players with novel effects. In addition, the number of frames in the fluctuating display, that is, the number of positions that make the player think that the displayed symbols will stop by slowing down the fluctuation speed while the displayed symbols are fluctuating, is the number of positions where the displayed symbols can be stopped. By changing the position according to the current variable state of the displacement member 670, the player can easily understand at which position the displayed symbol will stop.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, by combining the lightning bolt LED 671 and the combination pattern R3, a display mode in which a lightning bolt runs toward the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed (see FIG. 114(a)) ), so that it is possible for the player to easily watch which display symbol will be stopped and displayed on the newly formed active line, but this is not limited to this, and other It may be configured to have a symbol or pattern.

Furthermore, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED 671) provided in the variable display unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable decorative accessory is located at a specific position, a new effective line can be formed. It may be configured. In addition, a new effective line may be formed when the displayed symbol is first stopped and displayed and then the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED 671) emits light. In this way, by forming a new active line by combining display symbols that can be displayed in a variable manner and elements other than the display symbols to satisfy a predetermined condition, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol. When playing the game, players have to pay close attention not only to the fluctuating display mode of the displayed symbols, but also to the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessories, which prevents players from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the display contents of the display area of the inner reel 811 during the second pseudo fluctuation performance will be described. When the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5 during the first pseudo-variation performance explained with reference to FIG. 114(b), the second pseudo-variation performance is executed and the displacement member 670 The display area of the inner reels 811 is varied in the direction of making it narrower, and each inner reel 811 starts to fluctuate (rotate) again. During this second pseudo fluctuation performance, the display area of the inner reel 811 is reduced to one display symbol, and only one valid line (second line S2) of display symbols is formed.

Then, the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c enter a reach state in which the red 7 symbol R2 is stopped and displayed to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the player A variable display is executed in which the user pays attention only to the type of display symbol that is stopped and displayed at 811b.

Next, the flow of the operation contents of various devices while the pseudo fluctuation effect (special reach 3) is being executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices during a pseudo-continuous performance (during a pseudo-variable performance). As shown in FIG. 116, when the pseudo fluctuation effect (special reach 3) is executed, various devices provided in the variable display unit 80 (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7 segment display section 1600, displacement member 670 , lightning LED 671) are configured to be driven at predetermined timing.

Specifically, first, each inner reel 811 rotates in accordance with the timing when the special symbol variation is executed, and first, the left inner reel 811a is controlled to stop so that the left combination symbol R3a stops at a specific position. Then, the right inner reel 811c is controlled to stop so that the right combination symbol R3b stops at a specific position. After that, the lightning bolt LED 671 lights up, and four valid lines (first special line L1 to fourth special line L4) are formed. Then, when the special symbol R6 of the inner reel 811b stops on the fifth special line L5, which is effectively determined in the state where the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed (FIG. 114(a) ), the first chance is established, and the pseudo-variation performance continues.

When the first chance is established, each inner reel 811 starts to fluctuate again, and the displacement member 670 changes from the first position, which is the initial position, to the second position (the area of the display surface of the inner reel 811 is in the first position). (see FIG. 114(b)). In this state, regardless of the stop display mode of the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c, an effect is executed to draw attention only to whether or not the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5. Here, when the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5, each inner reel 811 finally starts to fluctuate again, and the displacement member 670 is changed from the second position to the third position ( (See Figure 115).

When the displacement member 670 is changed to the third position, there is one active line (second line S2), and both the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c reach the reach of the displayed symbol (third symbol) indicating a jackpot win. The red 7 symbol R2 is stopped and displayed so as to be in the state (see FIG. 115). As shown in FIG. 116, the upper limit of the effect display time to be executed corresponding to the variable display time of the special symbol is set longer, and the effect is executed while temporarily stopping the third symbol during the effect display. .

In addition, in this control example, the period in which one special symbol variation is executed is used to execute the above-mentioned pseudo-variation performance, that is, a production in which the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is varied. However, as an alternative configuration, it may be configured to execute an effect that varies the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main controller 110, which will be described later with reference to FIG. It is preferable to determine the lottery results in advance and set a performance (continuous performance) to span a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the preliminary determination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the special symbol lottery results multiple times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so it is possible for the player to know when the special symbol will be executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether a continuous performance has been executed in response to the fluctuating display of.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration is used in which a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but by varying the effective line of the third symbol, the player For example, it may be configured to provide a new fluctuating display effect for the third symbol, and for example, a pseudo fluctuating effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the set fluctuation time), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during a pseudo fluctuation effect is a predetermined number of times and the ready-to-reach display is displayed, the possibility of winning the jackpot will be increased. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while always having a feeling of expectation regarding a jackpot during the period from the execution of the pseudo-variation performance until the end of the pseudo-variation performance.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126, the contents of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be explained. First, FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and variable display device unit 80, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. .

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers. Note that in this control example, the payout control device 111 is a part of the sub-control device, and is configured such that various commands are sent in one direction from the main control device 110, but the payout control device is not limited to this. The main control device 110 may be configured to be able to send various commands in both directions so that the main control device 110 can receive commands from the main control device 111.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the right side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and controls to these via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (to be described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 and the turning on and off of lamp display devices (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, 7-segment display section 1600, etc.) 227. It controls the setting of the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 where output and variable effects (variable displays) are performed. The drive motors KM (inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c, outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c, and displacement member drive motors KM3a to 3c) for driving various devices provided in the variable display unit 80 are driven. It is. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the drive motor KM, and the frame button 22 are connected to the input/output port 225.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and based on the determined display mode. It executes drive control of various drive motors KM and light emission control of the 7-segment display section 1600. The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the display mode of the variable display executed using the variable display device unit 80. various devices, such as changing the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227 during the reach state, and changing the targets (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600) for which variable display is executed. Vary the command content for .

Although not shown, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the detection results of a detection means for detecting the drive results of each drive motor KM. Based on the received detection results from each detection means, the type of symbol display that is being stopped and displayed can be determined. As a result, it is determined whether the display mode determined by the audio lamp control device 113 matches the display mode actually stopped and displayed, and if they do not match, an error command is set and an error notification is issued. configured to run. As a result, it is possible to prevent a fluctuating display from being performed that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that this control example has different variable display modes, so for example, if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the operation content of the inner reel 811, a variable display mode that does not use the inner reel 811 (for example, a variable display mode that does not use the inner reel 811) 821 and a variable display mode using the 7-segment display section 1600). As a result, even if a problem occurs in one variable display mode, it is possible to perform a variable display that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Further, in this case, the changing display mode of the switching destination may be changed depending on the set gaming state, or the setting may be configured by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22). Also good.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be explained. In the main control device 110, the pachinko machine performs special symbol (first symbol) lottery, normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. Perform 10 main processes. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display control conditions on the variable display device unit 80. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform settings and the like.

To set conditions for the special symbol lottery and display control in the first symbol display device 37 and variable display unit 80, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. A first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a first initial value used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 127), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 137). The updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each consisting of one execution area and four reservation areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the entrance (through gate) 66.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)). When the value matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: period (period) in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) is composed of a first winning random number table for low probability times and a first winning random number table for high probability times. The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with low probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with high probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If the random number is a miss, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is a miss.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random value that becomes a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and that random value "0" is the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. (See FIG. 120(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability (Fig. 120(a) ) is stored in ). In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 10 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/40".

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are set in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 39", jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", jackpot B (16R If the number is "80-99", jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot) is selected.

In this embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)) are three types: jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but the number is not limited to four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or two or less, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. Further, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot may be set to be different.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the variable display device unit 80 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79 for low probability situations. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely off" to be selected.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the variable display unit 80 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 137) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ing.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. As shown in FIG. 121(a), this variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 121(b)) and a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121(c)). At least a deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)) is set. In addition, when the potential state (with probability change and no time saving state) is set as the gaming state, the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for losing is referenced, and when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the losing state is set as the gaming state. The usage (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to.

First, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50" is "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and for the variation patterns of special reach (90 seconds). ), "180 to 198" are respectively set as determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS1 value is set as a jackpot. from the variable pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 121(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as mentioned above, the stop type is determined from the stop type selection table (not shown) as whether it is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", miss reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete error, a short error with a relatively short variation time (7 seconds) and a long error with a long variation time (10 seconds) are set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to ``0-98'' for a short error (7 seconds), and ``99-198'' for a long error (10 seconds).

In addition, for missed reaches, "0 to 149" for various types of missed normal reaches (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for various types of missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "150 to 197" for missed special reaches (60 seconds) "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the normal gaming state, and changes the variation obtained from the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

FIG. 121(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3. This losing (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that becomes a loss when the gaming state is a probability variable gaming state. This deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As mentioned above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete failure is determined. , if it is in the range of "90 to 99", the off reach is determined.

In this way, when the game is in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is a miss is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that when the probability changes, the fluctuation time of a loss becomes long, and the period until a jackpot is reached becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is delayed during the variable probability game state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and the player feels bored.

As explained above using FIGS. 121(b) to 121(d), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) allow players to win the special symbol jackpot. In this control example, the content of each variation pattern table is defined so that the longer a variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

When a variation pattern indicating normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), or special reach (90 seconds) is set, a variation pattern command to indicate that is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. A reach effect is set based on the variation pattern command that is output and received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Here, in this control example, a plurality of reach effect modes are prepared, and for example, among the inner reels 811, the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c have the same display symbol (blue 7 A symbol reach effect mode in which the symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) is stopped and displayed, a combination reach effect mode in which the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a specific position, and the lightning bolt LED 671 is lit, and the outer reel 821 is rotated. It has a rotating reach effect mode that makes it easy to move.

In other words, the main control device 110 outputs only a command indicating that a reach effect is to be executed and a variable display period as a variable display effect set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. The player side is configured to select which reach effect mode to set as the reach effect mode to be executed this time.

When setting the reach effect mode to be executed this time, the audio lamp control device 113 uses the current gaming state, the result of the special symbol lottery, whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22, and a value that can be randomly obtained. (the value of the production counter), etc. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with a variety of reach effects, so in the process of executing variable display effects, reach effects can be executed at various timings, and players can prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the reach effect mode to be executed this time is configured to be set at the timing when the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, that is, at the start timing of a new special symbol variation. , without limitation. For example, the stop display mode (stop roll) of the left inner reel 811a that stops the variable display may be determined first, and the ready-to-reach effect mode to be executed this time may be set in accordance with the determination result. By configuring in this way, the timing of setting the reach effect mode can be made different. Furthermore, since the timing at which the reach effect mode is set can be made different from the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbols starts, that is, the timing at which the execution processing is concentrated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to It is possible to suppress a situation in which a large load is temporarily applied.

In addition, special reach 3 (see FIGS. 114 and 115), which is a pseudo-variation effect, can be terminated in the middle of the effect (so-called false effect), for example, if the current lottery result is a loss and the variation pattern In the case of "Normal Reach" where a variation time of 30 seconds is set as "Normal Reach", a short fake effect is executed where the variation display ends without the first chance being established, and a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the variation pattern. In the case of "Super Reach", it may be configured to execute a false effect in which the first chance is realized and the second chance is not realized.

By executing such a false effect, even if the 90-second variation time is not set, it is possible to execute the same effect as the pseudo-variable effect, so that the player is not informed of the first half of the pseudo-variable effect. It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the part, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game without experiencing at least a part of the pseudo-variation performance.

Furthermore, for example, if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is set, the special symbol will be a jackpot at the timing when the second chance in the pseudo variation effect can be established. It may be configured such that a combination of display symbols (third symbol) for indicating winning is displayed in a stopped state. As a result, after the first chance is established, the effect of whether or not the second chance is established (the effect of whether the special symbol R6 stops on the 5th special line), or the blue 7 symbol The content of the performance can be set so that either R1 or the red 7 symbol R2 is in a ready-to-reach state. Therefore, regardless of which performance content is set for the player, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of expectation for a jackpot, and therefore the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is set, after the first chance is established (see FIG. 114(a)), an effect for establishing the second chance ( It may be configured to perform an effect (skip effect) that skips the process (see FIG. 114(b)) and executes the final stage of the pseudo fluctuation effect (see FIG. 115). Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player. It should be noted that even in performance modes other than the special reach 3, it may be configured to perform a fake performance or a skip performance that corresponds to the length of the set variable time.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 66. , is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 120(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 120(c)). , it is determined that the normal symbol has won if it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second win random number table (see FIG. 120(c)). In addition, this second winning random number table is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a fluctuating display of the normal symbols. is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the second prize opening 140 is opened only "0.2 seconds x once". In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the second winning hole 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". The opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display of the normal symbols. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the second winning hole 140 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the release period of the second winning hole 140 is Since the time becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit based on the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the second winning hole 140 is opened for "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time is The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 137).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display unit 80 according to the values of the counters, etc. , the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. A counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a variable probability flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a time saving flag 203k, a counter buffer 203y, It also has at least a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area exclusively for the first winning hole 64 (special symbol 1), and has one execution area and four reserved areas (1st reserved area to 4th reserved area). Each of these areas stores the values of a first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is started. Separately, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is held, various information that would be obtained when the original lottery was held is calculated based on the data corresponding to the starting winnings (values of each counter C1 to C3). Hereinafter, prediction will be described as pre-reading the lottery results of special symbols. Note that the various information includes validity, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to store the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 1 in the RAM 233. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbols 2.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning occurs in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by drawing a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is predicted. This prediction (pre-reading) is configured to refer to the jackpot judgment value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or variable probability gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize starts. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning hole 140 (special symbol 2), and is a storage area dedicated to the second winning hole 140 (special symbol 2), and is a storage area for the first winning hole 64 (special symbol 1) in contrast to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. ) is changed to the second winning hole 140 (special symbol 2), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is applied to the vacant areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The areas with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) are stored in order from among the areas in which the area is located. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d controls the variable display (variable display device unit) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (number of times of waiting) up to 4 times (fluctuating display performed at 80). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first prize opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the number of reserved balls counter 203d increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S504 in FIG. 131). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 128).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 128 and S505 in FIG. 131). ). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the variable display unit 80 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning hole 140 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 131, and is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 128). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending balls N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 128, S511 in FIG. 131). reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 up to four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S804 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S705 in FIG. 133).

When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the through gate 66, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 134: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The initial value of this probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending performance based on jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot C (2R probability variation, short time, no jackpot) If it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referenced to determine whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is carried out based on the first random number table 202a for low probability times.

In addition, in this control example, the timing to set the probability change flag 203g to ON is set to the start timing of the ending effect (jackpot However, it may be set so that the special symbol lottery that is executed after the end of the jackpot can be performed with high probability.For example, it can be set to be turned on at the timing when the ending effect of the jackpot game is finished. Alternatively, if the conditions for executing the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game are met, the probability change flag 203g may be set to ON before the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the timing at which the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF is when a jackpot game is started, but the timing is not limited to this, and for example, a display symbol (second symbol) indicating that the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot. It may be configured such that the setting is turned off at the timing when the is stopped and displayed.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a special symbol.If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a special symbol. If the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending performance (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control process (see FIG. 138). (See S1215). It is then referred to in the normal symbol variation process to determine whether or not the time is being shortened (see S708 in FIG. 133), and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation process. (See S205 in FIG. 128). In addition, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 and the above-mentioned variable probability flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state and a time-saving state.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (FIG. 138, S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with special symbols (high probability state with normal symbols).If the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols (low probability state with normal symbols). The initial value of this time-saving flag 203k is set to OFF, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot game) based on jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot). , is set to on (see S1216 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referenced to determine whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), both the probability variable flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is provided together with the probability variable game. On the other hand, in jackpot C (2R jackpot with variable probability and no time reduction), although the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, the time reduction flag 203k remains OFF, resulting in a potential game state in which only probability variation games are awarded.

Here, the probability game state (the probability change state of the special symbol) is set such that the probability that the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 will be a jackpot is set to a high probability, It is difficult for a player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a potential game unless the game state is indicated by changing the performance mode or the like. On the other hand, in a time-saving game, the number of openings and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 are changed, so it is easy to distinguish whether it is a normal game or a time-saving game. It is.

Therefore, when a time-saving game is given along with a probability-variable game based on jackpot A (16R probability-variable jackpot) (when a probability-variable gaming state is set), the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game. , If only a probability variable game is awarded based on jackpot C (2R probability variable, short time, no jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a probability variable game (so-called latent probability variable state). As a result, the player has to guess whether the game is a normal game or a variable probability game, which can improve the player's interest.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data. The stack area stores the contents of the internal registers and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area stores the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. have.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 137) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 136). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 122(a). The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a variable pattern selection table 222a, an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, a special production scenario table 222f, and a symbol group storage area 222g. ing.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is already well known, so it will be briefly explained. Based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command. From the content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)), more detailed variation content is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, a description will be given based on the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 222a in the variation pattern selection table in this control example. In this control example, in addition to the special symbol lottery results or the validity determination results, if the set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is a long period (long period), the third symbol is selected by referring to the dedicated fluctuation pattern table. It is configured to set the variation display mode of.

Next, the contents of the long fluctuation variation pattern table 222a3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram of the contents defined in the long variation variation pattern table 222a3. As shown in FIG. 123, the long variation variation pattern table 222a3 includes the type of variation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) set for this special symbol variation, the lottery result of this special symbol variation, The performance mode is set based on the currently set motion scenario (motion pattern) and the acquired value of the performance counter 223j.

The outer reel operation table 222c is a data table in which the operation details of the outer reel 821 are stored. In this outer reel operation table 222c, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands received from the main controller 110 are set, and each operation scenario corresponds to the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). An operational scenario is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation details (motor data) of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are set in association with the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) Each time the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is executed, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is updated (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3104 in FIG. 150). ). Based on the motor data set here, the motor MPU controls the drive of each outer reel drive motor KM2a to KM2c.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol, in other words, the dynamic display (third Apart from the fluctuating display of symbols, the system is configured to execute an effect display in which the outer reel 821 and the inner reel 811 are driven as an effect to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol.

In other words, the display symbols printed on the display surfaces of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 are configured to be switchable between being used as the third symbol and as a production symbol for production. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which variable display mode (operation display mode) is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a surprising game. .

Moreover, the variable display mode for showing the third symbol is also configured to be changed during one dynamic display executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. To explain specifically, for example, when a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set as a variation pattern of special symbols, the displayed symbols printed on the inner reel 811 are displayed for the first 30 seconds. The third symbol is used as the third symbol, and the display symbol printed on the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol for the second half of 30 seconds. Thereby, it is possible to set a variable display mode that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to provide a more unexpected game.

In addition, in this control example, any one of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display section 1600 is configured to have a variable display mode for displaying the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light emitting means (display means) made up of a plurality of LEDs may be provided at a specific location on the game board 13, and the third symbol may be displayed in a variable manner using the light emitting means (display means). . As a result, the variable display mode using the inner reel 811, outer reel 821, and 7-segment display section 1600 can all be used as a variable display mode for production, so it is possible to perform production with an increased degree of freedom. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, during the variable display period of the special symbol, the above-mentioned light emitting means (display means) is used to notify that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and only when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the inner reel 811, The third symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed using either the outer reel 821 or the 7-segment display section 1600.

The inner reel operation table 222d is a data table in which the operation details of the inner reel 811 are stored. Among them, the reel operation table 222d has a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands received from the main controller 110, which correspond to the fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). An operational scenario is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation details (motor data) of the inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c are set in association with the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) is performed. Each time the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151) is executed, the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q is updated (see S3202 in FIG. 151), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3204 in FIG. 151). ). Based on the motor data set here, the motor MPU controls the drive of each outer reel drive motor KM1a to 1c.

The symbol operation table 222e shows the operation of each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display unit 80 according to the gaming state and gaming conditions to be set. This is a data table that stores motion information that is referred to when setting an initial state (motion pattern) of an aspect. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of variable display modes (operation display modes) for showing the lottery results of special symbols (for example, a variable display mode using the inner reel 811, a variable display mode using the outer reel 821). mode, or a variable display mode using the 7-segment display section 1600). For example, when changing the variable display mode to be executed due to a different gaming state being set, it is necessary to position the various devices in an initial state corresponding to the changed variable display mode. Since the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial states (operation patterns) of various devices corresponding to each variable display mode, the drive control to be performed on the various devices when the variable display mode is changed is stored in the symbol operation table 222e. Can be executed accurately.

In addition, in the symbol operation table 222e, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, The 7-segment display section 1600 and the displacement member 670) are configured to perform special operation control, and the initial state (operation pattern) of the special performance is stored in the symbol operation table 222e.

In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, each device provided in the variable display unit 80 (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670 ), and the initial state (operation pattern) of the jackpot effect is also stored in the symbol operation table 222e.

Here, referring to FIG. 124, to specifically explain the contents stored in the symbol operation table 222e, the operation pattern when the normal state or the potential state is set as the gaming state is The reels 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) are defined as operable (indicated by "○" in FIG. 124), and the outer reels 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel 821b) are defined as operable (indicated by "○" in FIG. 124). The reel 821c) is defined as a first area (indicated as "first" in FIG. 124) formed of a transparent member, and the 7-segment display section 1600 (left 7-segment display section 1600a, middle 7-segment display section 1600b, right The 7-segment display section 1600c) is set to non-display (denoted as "x" in FIG. 124), and the displacement members 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) are set to the first position (most open). A motion pattern (first motion pattern) that defines the current state (see FIG. 114(a)) is stored.

When this first operation pattern is selected, the inner reel 811 rotates in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed as the third symbol. (See FIG. 110(a)).

Next, as an operation pattern when the time saving state or the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the inner reels 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) can be operated (in FIG. 124). The outer reel 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel 821c) is defined as a second region (denoted as "second" in FIG. 124) where the light emitting region 822 is formed. The 7-segment display section 1600 (left 7-segment display section 1600a, middle 7-segment display section 1600b, right 7-segment display section 1600c) is defined as operable (denoted as "○" in FIG. 124), and the displacement member A motion pattern (second motion pattern) that defines 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) as a first position (most open state (see FIG. 114(a))) is stored. ing.

When this second operation pattern is selected, a variable display of the 7-segment display section 1600 is executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600 (Fig. 111 (see (a)). In this control example, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second operation pattern is set. In other words, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second area of the outer reel 821 is displayed and the player cannot visually confirm the rotation status of the inner reel 811.

With this configuration, for example, if a problem occurs in the 7-segment display section 1600 and the display mode of the 7-segment display section 1600 makes it impossible to notify the lottery result of the special symbol without feeling strange, The outer reel 821 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811. It becomes possible to stop display the lottery results using the inner reel 811.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description of the contents defined in the symbol operation table 222e will be continued. In a state where the first motion pattern is set as the motion pattern, the content of a special reach (first special performance) to be executed when the first performance condition is satisfied is defined as a motion pattern "motion 3".

In this "operation 3", only the inner reel 811b of the inner reels 811 is set to be operable "○", each outer reel 821 is set to the first position, and the left 7-segment display section 1600a of the 7-segment display section 1600 and only the right 7-segment display section 1600c can be displayed, the left displacement member 670a and the right displacement member 670c of the displacement member 670 can be variably operated in the first position, and the middle displacement member 670b can be variably operated in the range of the first to third positions. The operation contents are specified. When this motion pattern "Movement 3" is set, the effect (special reach 1) described above with reference to FIG. 112 is executed.

In addition, in a state where the first movement pattern is set as the movement pattern, the contents of special reach 2 (second special effect) to be executed when the second effect condition is satisfied are defined, and the first movement is set as the movement pattern. In a state where the pattern is set, the contents of special reach 3 (third special performance) to be executed when the third performance condition is satisfied are defined. In addition, "Movement 6" is defined as a motion pattern corresponding to a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game.

The special effect scenario table 222f defines the operation control contents for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) when a special effect is executed, corresponding to the elapsed time. This data table stores the operation control contents corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223i, which is set when a special effect is executed and is updated periodically.

Next, the contents of the special effect scenario table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 125, the special effect scenario table 222f includes various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, and displacement member 670) are defined in accordance with the elapsed time (value of scenario counter 223i). In addition, since the scenario counter 223i is configured to update the counter value every 1 millisecond as described later, the scenario is actually defined in the special effect scenario table 222f in millisecond units. In FIG. 125, scenarios are defined in units of seconds (S units) for convenience of explanation.

First, special performance (reach) 1 is associated with a special performance scenario with a performance period of 60 seconds (60S), which can be set when a variable time of 60 seconds is set. In this special effect (reach) 1, each inner reel 811 starts rotating at the timing when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds, that is, the timing when the special symbol variation starts, and each outer reel 821 An operation scenario is defined in which the displacement member 670 is positioned in a first region (first position) so that the player can visually confirm the rotation status of the displacement member 670.

Thereafter, the left inner reel 811a is stopped when the remaining variation time is 55 seconds, the right outer reel 821c is stopped when the remaining variation time is 50 seconds, and the middle inner reel 811b is started when the remaining variation time is 40 seconds. Stop, that is, all the inner reels 811 are temporarily stopped and the 7-segment display section 1600 is completely lit. Then, when the remaining variation time is 35 seconds, the left 7-segment display section 1600a and the right 7-segment display section 1600c display a symbol resembling a "7", and when the remaining variation time is 34 seconds, the Nakauchi reel is displayed. 811b (see FIG. 112). The operation scenario is defined such that the inner reel 811b stops at the timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds.

In this way, when performing various operation controls on a plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670), an operation scenario for each device can be defined in advance. By doing so, special effects can be executed smoothly.

The symbol group storage area 222g is data storing information for restricting the symbol types (“0” to “9”) that can be selected when setting display symbols to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600. In the area, a display symbol to be stopped and displayed is set using the symbol type included in the set symbol group.

The symbol group storage area 222g is a storage area in which a symbol group that is referred to when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol is stored. Here, the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g will be explained with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g.

As shown in FIG. 126, three symbol groups (symbol groups A to C) are defined in the symbol group storage area 222g, and each symbol group has a different number. Specifically, symbol group A has the numbers "0, 1, 7", symbol group B has the numbers "2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9", and symbol group C has the numbers "0 to 7". 9'' are stored in association with each other.

This symbol group storage area 222g stores the display mode of each stopped symbol when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and the variable display of the third symbol using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (see FIG. 111) is executed. This is used when setting. As described above, in this control example, only one segment (light-emitting region 822) of the seven segments is formed in a different form, and this light-emitting region 822 is visible to the player even when the light is off compared to the other segments. It is formed as a segment that is easy to move.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress misidentification by the player, a process is executed to set the stopping symbol mode, and the symbol group storage area 222g is used in this process.

Returning to FIG. 122(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 122(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. This RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a short remaining time counter 223g, At least a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a performance counter 223j, a game state storage area 223k, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stopped symbol storage area 223n, a returning flag 223l, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided. It is being

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first to fourth areas for special symbol 1, first to fourth areas for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning occurs in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is , is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and converts the winning information into the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is applied to four areas (first area to fourth area) of the corresponding special symbol among special symbol 1 (first special symbol) or special symbol 2 (second special symbol). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable performance (fluctuating display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and variable display device unit 80). This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2308 in FIG. 142). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the variable display unit 80. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. The value of the counter 223b is configured to be notified to the player using a dedicated display means.

In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, allows the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main control device 110 to be 4. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c means that the number of reserved balls is added when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, and the special symbol 2 which is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on a dedicated display means. The only difference is that it is used to display the number of reserved balls symbol, and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the operation contents output to the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are made to differ. For example, a special sound or light emission mode may be provided that is executed only when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to store the reserved balls.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern reception process that is executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 142), and the fluctuation display on the variable display unit 80 is set to ON. is turned off when the setting is made (see S2602 in FIG. 145). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 identifies the device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600) that executes the variable display of the third symbol based on the received display variation pattern command, and controls the corresponding MPU ( Display control is executed using the segment MPU 114a and the reel MPU 114b.

The stop type selection flag 223e is set on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 142), and is turned off when the stop type is set (see FIG. 145). (See S2609). When the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. The display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable effect so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the variable display unit 80. Control.

In this control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600) controlled by the display control device 114 are used to display the third symbol variation corresponding to the above-described variation display of the special symbol. In addition to the display, it is configured to be able to execute a variable display for suggesting a special symbol lottery result and a variable display for a jackpot effect executed during a jackpot game. The variable display for suggestive effect is a variable display command for suggestive effect that is set for a device other than the device targeted for the third symbol variable display when the variable pattern command for display is set by the audio lamp control device 113. is executed when the display control device 114 receives this.

Furthermore, when a jackpot start command for display set by the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the variable display for jackpot effect is executed based on the content included in the command. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of displaying a third symbol variation, a device that does not execute a third symbol variation corresponding to one special symbol variation is used to execute a variation display for suggestive effect. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which device is executing the third symbol variation, and it is possible to provide an unexpected game.

In addition, in devices where display symbols are printed in advance, such as the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, based on the display variation pattern command set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display symbol is changed to the third symbol. Since it is possible to switch between a pattern used as a pattern and a pattern used as a performance symbol for a suggestive performance, it is possible to provide a game with more surprise to the player.

The remaining time saving number counter 223g is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol variations until the time saving state ends. This remaining time shortening counter 223g indicates that the time saving state has been set in the state setting process (see S2317 in FIG. 144) executed in the command determination process (see S2212 in FIG. 142) of the audio lamp control device 113. If it is determined that a status command has been received (S2506 in FIG. 144: Yes), a value of 100 is set (S2507 in FIG. 144), and in the variation display setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 145), the display variation After setting the pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S2606 in FIG. 145).

Then, in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146), the current value is referenced, and if it is determined that the value is 5 or less (S2709 in FIG. 146: Yes), execution is possible during the time saving state. The remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) for displaying the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining time shortening number) is executed, and the remaining time shortening number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600 (FIG. 111(b) )reference).

In other words, in this control example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the time reduction state reaches five, the player is notified of the remaining number of time reductions. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving state from suddenly ending without giving advance notice to the player. Moreover, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed immediately after the time reduction state is set, making it difficult to grasp the stop display contents of the third symbol.

In this control example, the period in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed is a period in which the number of remaining time reductions is 5 or less, but is not limited to this, and may be a period in which the remaining number of time reductions is 10 or less. Further, there is no need to continuously display the number of remaining time reductions; for example, the display may be configured to be displayed when the number of remaining time reductions is a multiple of 10. Furthermore, in this control example, the remaining time reduction count is always displayed during the period in which the remaining time reduction count is displayed, but it may also be configured such that whether or not to display the remaining time reduction count is determined by lottery. Alternatively, the player may operate the frame button 22 to select whether or not to display the number of remaining time reductions.

The specific remaining period flag 223h is a flag to indicate whether or not it is a period to display the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state, and is set to ON when it is a period to display the number of remaining time reductions. be. This specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON when the remaining number of times display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) is executed (see S2801 in FIG. 147), and when the value of the short remaining time counter 223g becomes 0. It is set to off (see S2806 in FIG. 147).

Also, it is referenced in the stop symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) for setting the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol (see S3406 in FIG. 153), and is determined to be set to ON. (S3406 in FIG. 153: Yes), a stop symbol using a numerical value different from the displayed numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions is set (see S3408 in FIG. 153).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the stop display mode of the third symbol (stop symbol) and the display mode showing the remaining time shortening number from being the same display mode, so that it is possible for the player to Information indicating the lottery results of special symbols and information indicating the number of remaining time reductions can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

The scenario counter 223i is a counter that is referenced when determining the timing to execute operation control for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) included in the variable display unit 80, and is a counter that is referred to when determining the timing to execute operation control for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) included in the variable display unit 80, and is In the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146) executed in the process (see S2213 in FIG. 145), if the action scenario (production scenario) to be executed this time is set (see S2707 in FIG. 146), the setting A value corresponding to the action scenario (acting scenario) that has been performed is set (see S2708 in FIG. 146).

The set value is subtracted in the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3005 in FIG. 149). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 149), the operation control details for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) included in the variable display unit 80 Referenced to set.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 125, the operation scenario (performance scenario) defines the operation control contents corresponding to each device in association with the value of the scenario counter 223i, and the operation control process (shown in FIG. Based on the value of the scenario counter 223i at the time when Step 149 (see S2211 of 149) was executed and the currently set motion scenario (acting scenario), the motion control content to be executed in the current process is determined and determined. Set the operation command (motor data) according to the operation control content. Then, in the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), an operation command is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 outputs an operation command to each device based on the content of the received operation command. perform an action.

In this control example, when an action scenario (direction scenario) is set, a value corresponding to the time of the action scenario (direction scenario) is set in the scenario counter 223i, and the value of the scenario counter 223i is updated every millisecond. It is configured to perform subtraction. In other words, when a 30-second motion scenario (production scenario) is set, "30000" is set as the value of the scenario counter 223i, and each time the motion control process (S2211 in FIG. 149) is executed, the scenario counter 223i Although the configuration is such that the value of 1 is subtracted by 1, any configuration is sufficient as long as the progress of the operation scenario can be determined. , a storage means for storing time measurement information at the timing when the operation scenario (direction scenario) is set; and a difference between the time measurement information stored in the storage means and the current time information measured by the time measurement means. The configuration may be such that the progress of the action scenario (performance scenario) is determined based on the calculation result.

In addition, in this control example, the operation control contents of a plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670, etc.) included in the variable display device unit 80 are unified and defined in one operation scenario (acting scenario). By doing so, the configuration is such that it is difficult for discrepancies to occur in the operation contents of a plurality of devices, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that an operation scenario (performance scenario) is defined for each device, A dedicated scenario counter may be provided for each operation scenario. With this configuration, by combining a plurality of operation scenarios, it is possible to increase the number of operation control patterns using a plurality of devices included in the variable display device unit 80.

The production counter 223j is a counter used in the audio lamp control device 113 to select various presentations (variable patterns, preview presentations, etc.) and for various lottery draws. to 198 (not shown).

The gaming status storage area 223k is a data area for storing information indicating the current gaming status included in various status commands output from the main controller 110, and is a data area for storing information indicating the current gaming status included in various status commands output from the main controller 110. Used when determining the currently set gaming state. In this control example, a status command indicating the current gaming status is set each time a different gaming status is set in the main controller 110 and each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Since the configuration is such that the status command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the status command is set, the current gaming status can be reliably determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In addition, the gaming state storage area 223k of this control example has an area for storing the currently set gaming state and an area for storing the previously set gaming state, For example, just before the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game), it is configured to be able to determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and if the player wins the jackpot while the time saving state is set, and then tries again after the jackpot ends. It is possible to set different presentation modes for the case where a time saving state is set and the case where a jackpot is won in a state where a normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot.

The returning flag 223l is a flag to indicate that the reel operation confirmation process is currently being executed after the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process is being executed. . The returning flag 223l is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process (see S2013 in FIG. 140) is executed during the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139). 140), and when the outer reel 821 moves to the second position (S2102 in FIG. 140: Yes), it is set to off (S2113 in FIG. 140).

When determining whether a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed after the reel operation confirmation process is executed until it is detected that the outer reel 821 has moved to the second position (S2105 in FIG. 140), It is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2103 in FIG. 140). The returning flag 223l indicates that the outer reel 821 has not reached the second position even though 10 seconds have passed since the reel operation confirmation process was executed (S2105 in FIG. 140: Yes). When setting the error command (S2107 in FIG. 140), it is set to off. It is also set to off when the reel operation confirmation process is executed normally (see S2113 in FIG. 140).

The operation mode storage area 223m stores information for determining the current operation mode (operation pattern). As for the operation mode, "Movement 1" is stored if the current gaming state is a normal state or a potential state, "Movement 2" is stored if the current gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, and "Movement 2" is stored if the current gaming state is in a special reach 1 state. "Movement 3" is memorized, "Movement 4" is memorized if special reach 2 is in progress, "Movement 5" is memorized if it is in special reach 3, and "movement 6" is memorized if it is a jackpot. . Each operation mode (operation pattern) is set with reference to the symbol operation table 222e.

In this control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670, ) are configured to differ in their operating modes (initial mode (initial position) until motion control is executed, presence or absence of motion control target).

Note that a holding means (backup means) may be provided that can hold the information indicating the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m even when the power is turned off. Thereby, even after the power is restored, the operating modes of the various devices of the variable display unit 80 can be set to appropriate operating modes.

The stopped symbol storage area 223n is a storage area for temporarily storing the set display mode of the stopped symbols. This stop symbol storage area 223n contains a stop that is executed when it is determined that the stop type selection flag is set to on in the variable display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) (S2607 in FIG. 145: Yes). Information indicating the stop symbols set in the symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) is stored.

In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state (the operation pattern (operation mode) is "operation 2") and the 7-segment display section 1600 is used to display the third symbol in a variable manner, a predetermined condition is set. When this is established (when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining time reduction number) for which the time saving state is set becomes 5 or less), the remaining time reduction number is displayed using the 7-segment display section 1600.

In this state where the number of remaining time reductions is displayed, if the third symbol's stop symbol (a pattern imitating a number) and the value indicating the number of remaining time reductions are displayed in a display mode that shows the same number, There has been a problem in that it is difficult to understand whether the displayed display mode is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol or for showing the number of time reductions remaining. Therefore, in this control example, when the number of remaining time shortening is displayed, a process is performed to control the third symbol's stop symbol (a pattern imitating a number) to be different from the value indicating the remaining time shortening. The stop symbols set in this process are stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n.

The outer reel operation counter 223p is a counter that is referenced when determining the period for issuing an operation instruction to the outer reel 821, and is a counter that is referenced when determining the period for issuing an operation instruction for the outer reel 821, and is used in the outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) of the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). When the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates that it is the timing to operate the outer reel 821 in the operation scenario (when the outer reel operation table is set), the value indicating the period for operating the outer reel 821 (END data) is set (S3107 in FIG. 150).

While the outer reel operation table 222c is being set, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141) (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and the value after the addition is It is referenced when determining whether the value has reached the END data (see S3103 in FIG. 150). Then, based on the reference result in S3103 in FIG. 150, the operations of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to KM2c are controlled.

The inner reel operation counter 223q differs from the above-mentioned outer reel operation counter 223p in that the target is changed from the outer reel 821 to the inner reel 811, and furthermore, the counter value is set and referenced. , is different in that the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is changed to the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151). Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, the operation scenario is managed based on the value of the scenario counter 223i, and when the operation scenario is the timing to operate any of the various devices, the operation scenario is managed for the device to be operated. The configuration is such that a dedicated counter is operated. In this way, it is divided into a main counter (scenario counter 223i) for managing a large flow of operations, and sub-counters (outer reel operation counter 223p, inner reel operation counter 223q) for managing the operation of each device. As a result, the number of items managed by the main counter can be reduced, and the scenario counter 223i, which is frequently executed, can be simplified.

Further, for example, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 to manage only the counters corresponding to the main counter and the display control device 114 to manage the counters corresponding to the sub-counters, the audio lamp control device 113, the operations of various devices can be centrally managed, and the operations of various devices can be synchronized.

When the main controller 110 detects a power outage, a power off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power off command, the power off flag 223y is turned on. is set, and power-off processing is executed (S2217 in FIG. 141). Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 139) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and data read processing is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S2010 in FIG. 139). As a result, the gaming information saved by the data storage process at the time of power outage can be reused by the data reading process in the startup process when the power is restored, and the game can be continued to be played. I can do it.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 142) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 127 to 138. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 399, 99, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. A through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and is used to display the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, or to display the variable display device This is a process for controlling the variable display (variable time) of the third symbol performed in the unit 80.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variable display unit 80 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

That is, in this control example, after the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is executed, a new special symbol variation is performed until the jackpot game ends (until the ending period of the jackpot game ends). You have configured it so that it will not start. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation where a new special symbol variation is started during a jackpot game and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, during a period when a stop display indicating that the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot is being executed, or during an ending period of a jackpot game, new special symbol fluctuations may occur. It may be set as a period in which it is possible to start a new special symbol fluctuation, or it may be set as a period in which a new special symbol variation can be started even during a jackpot game. Thereby, the number of executions of special symbol variations can be increased.

If it is not a special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display in the special symbol) (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory of the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value has been changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special symbol 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process moves to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are stored) (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 Since there are no reserved balls in either case, this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and the value is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process moves to S208.

In the process of S208, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not passed (S213: No), the display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is updated (S214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), a stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process is ended. Note that the stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure). This is a process for determining conditions (for example, variation time) regarding the production pattern (variation pattern) of the variation production performed on the 1-symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variable display unit 80.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are , the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302). In the process of S302, it is determined whether the probability is currently changing by determining whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to on.

If it is determined that the probability is changing (S302: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value for high probability of the first winning random number table (see FIG. 120(a)) are used. Based on the jackpot determination value, a lottery result is obtained to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot (S303). Specifically, the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the 10 random numbers set in the first winning random number table (see FIG. 117(a)). As mentioned above, 10 random numbers from 0 to 9 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the probability is not changing (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) with special symbols, so the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 is Based on the value and the first winning random number table for low probability times (see FIG. 120(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability times. A random value of "0" is set as the random number for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 and this random number match, the special symbol will be a jackpot. It is determined that After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), a jackpot is determined. The display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the variable display unit 80. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table. In this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is one of "0 to 39", the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the value is one of "40 to 79". In this case, the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and in the case of any of "80 to 99", the jackpot type is jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot).

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 121) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. After that, the process moves to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery result is a special symbol that is a miss (S305: No), a display mode when the special symbol is a miss is set corresponding to the special symbol (S308). ). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set according to the determined miss.

Next, a variation pattern when the game loses is determined according to the set gaming state. Specifically, when the current gaming state is a normal state or a potential state, a fluctuation pattern is determined using the losing (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121(c)), If the current gaming state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, a variation pattern is determined using the losing (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)). After that, the process moves to S310.

Note that in this control example, the variable pattern is determined using different variable pattern tables depending on the special symbol lottery result and the set gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a different variation pattern may be determined depending on the current number of balls on hold. Furthermore, in this control example, if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the same variable pattern table is used to set the variable pattern regardless of the set gaming state. , without being limited to this, even if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a different fluctuation pattern table depending on the set gaming state and the stored number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

In addition, in this control example, the same fluctuation pattern table (the (normal) fluctuation pattern table for losing (normal) 202d2) is used when the normal state is set as the gaming state and when the potential state is set. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from knowing whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a potential state based on the determined variation pattern.

Note that the configuration of this control example is different from the one in which, for example, a variation pattern table corresponding to each gaming state is provided, and a variation pattern table used during the normal state (normal variation pattern table) and a variation pattern table used during the potential state are provided. The variation pattern table used for (potential variation pattern table) may be configured to have slightly different contents. Specifically, the normal variation pattern table and the potential variation pattern table It is preferable to unify the selectable variation pattern types (variation time) in the pattern table and to make the selection ratio of each variation pattern different. With this configuration, although the player cannot identify the current gaming state from the determined variation pattern type, it is possible for the player to predict the current gaming state based on the selection ratio of the determined variation pattern type. can. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the variation pattern (missing variation pattern) of the special symbol variation that is executed a plurality of times.

Furthermore, the special variation pattern type (variation time) that is determined only when the potential variation pattern table is used may be configured to be selected with a low probability (for example, 1%). Thereby, the player can be made aware of the current gaming state only when the special variation pattern type is determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide benefits advantageous to the player (information that allows the player to grasp the current gaming status) for the special symbol change that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

In the process of S310, a variation pattern command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended and the special symbol is Return to fluctuation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, the stop display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S261). The display mode of the stopped symbols that are stopped at this time is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) in FIG. 129 (see S306 and S308 in FIG. 129).

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit, and the jackpot C becomes the jackpot C. If so, turn on the yellow LED. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. Note that the display color and lighting mode of the LEDs are not limited to those described above, but other lighting modes may be used as long as the type of jackpot and the fluctuation state can be identified.

After the process of S261 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process moves to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is a failure (not a jackpot) (S262: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (larger than 0) (S269) . If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than or equal to 1 (0) (S269: No), the process moves to S265. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process moves to S265. In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 130, in this control example, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the process corresponding to the result of the current special symbol variation is immediately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process of S262 may be configured to be executed after a predetermined time (predetermined stop display period) has elapsed since the stop display of the first symbol display device is set (see S261 in FIG. 130). good. In other words, the special symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the special symbol variation start process ends, and the stop display is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Also good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the special symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and determines whether or not a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (starting winning), This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and suspending their values when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 131) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) or not (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S502 ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning in the first winning hole 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the process moves to S507.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S505, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S506). In addition, in the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as the processing from S501 to S506 is performed for the winning prize in the second winning hole 140. The only difference is that a reservation process is executed for the second special symbol in response to a win in the second winning hole 140, and the other processes are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of S507 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 140 (S507: No), a pre-reading process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the pre-reading process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S513).

In this pre-reading process (FIG. 132, S513), first, it is determined whether there is a new prize in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (S601; No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is variable (S602), and the gaming state If the probability is variable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 120(a)) (S603), and the process moves to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not certain (S602: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120(a)) (S604), and the lottery result is obtained in S605. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination results executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is ended. In addition, in this pre-reading process (S513), not only this embodiment but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (missing reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is determined and sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command. It is also possible to configure the system to notify the user.

In addition, in this control example, the pre-reading process is executed both when a ball wins in the first winning hole 64 and when a ball wins in the second winning hole 140, but in either case For example, the pre-reading process may be executed only when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 corresponding to the special symbol 2, in which the special symbol variation start processing is executed preferentially. It may be configured to do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device and the first symbol associated with the second winning hole 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 520, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is winning, the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is performed while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S708). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state for normal symbols (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is a jackpot for special symbols (S709). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variable display unit 80 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S709: Yes), the process moves to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 120(c)).

In the process of S708, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of normal symbols (S708: No), the process moves to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 120(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S712: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S714: Yes), it is currently in the jackpot of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S715: Yes), the process moves to S717. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible during the special symbol jackpot, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the same procedure as when the normal symbol is missed is performed. , the number of opening times and opening time of the first electric accessory 520 are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S716), and the process moves to S719. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of normal symbols (S714: No), the process moves to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is determined. is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 (S717), and the process moves to S719.

In the process of S712, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S719: Yes), a variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device. The variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S719: No), the variable display time on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and the process ends. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the release period of the second winning hole 140 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S722). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. However, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133) is It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S724: Yes), the opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is set to start (S725), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 520 is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the electric accessory The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66, and if the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 134), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved pitch number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process moves to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1012 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S1012 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (FIG. 137), the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1013, S1014) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S1011), and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 137), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command to In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 131) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variable pattern command, stop type command, etc. necessary for variable display of the third symbol by the variable display unit 80 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or specified. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). Further, details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 (S1105). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. It starts in devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is finished, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129). , 37B is displayed as stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133), the variable display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device After the display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133). )do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process moves to S1101, and each process from S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1109: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1101 to S1107 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1108, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 135 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1113). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S1001). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 137), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific winning openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104 in FIG. 138), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 130) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1201, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1201: Yes), the probability change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and this process is ended as is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). A special symbol jackpot occurs when a special symbol jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display unit 80 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and when a special symbol jackpot occurs. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1204: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206) and a new round is started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1207), and the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208). If the closing condition of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the closing condition for the specific prize opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), which is the time for ball removal, has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the time saving counter 203h (S1217), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process is ended.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 155. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When start-up processing is executed, first, initial setting processing associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S2217 (see Figure 141). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2214 in FIG. 141: Yes), it executes the power-off process in S2217. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2217 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1514 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process moves to S2008.

Note that if this start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process moves to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2217 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process moves to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2217, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the variable display unit 80 to display an error message. You can.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S2217 is executed (see S2217 in FIG. 141). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process in S2217 is executed, the reason why the process in S2008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a major power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S2010). , the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2011). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main controller 110. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S2012), a reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the reel operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S2008 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely cut off. This is a case where only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and the process is started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process skips S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S2011, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2011), and then sets interrupt permission. (S2012), executes reel operation confirmation processing (S2013), and shifts to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S2008 from S2004 via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control can be continued.

Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), which is one process within the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reel operation confirmation process (S2013). In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), a process is executed to confirm whether the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 operate normally when the power is turned on.

In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), first, the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the second position (non-transparent area) (S2101). Here, by moving the outer reel unit 820 to the non-transparent area (second position), the inner reel operation confirmation process to be executed later can be made invisible. Next, the outer reel unit 820 determines whether or not it has been detected at the second origin position (S2102). If it is determined that the origin of the outer reel unit 820 has not been detected (S2102: No), then whether the returning flag 223l is on, that is, whether the outer reel unit 820 is being moved to the origin at the second position. It is determined whether or not (S2103). If it is determined that the returning flag 223l is not on (S2103: No), the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2104), and the process returns to S2102.

Returning to the process of S2102, it is determined whether the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin of the second position (S2102). However, if it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is not detected at the origin of the second position (S2102: No), it is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to on in the process of S2104 (S2103). . If it is determined that the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2103: Yes), a predetermined period of time is elapsed after the returning flag 223l is set to on, that is, after the outer reel unit 820 starts returning. It is determined whether or not (10 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S2105). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of recovery (S2105: No), the process returns to S2102 because recovery is in progress. On the other hand, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of recovery (S2105: No), an error command is set to notify of an abnormality in the outer reel unit 820 (S2106), and the power is cut off. loops infinitely until An abnormality in the outer reel unit 820 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify abnormality of the outer reel unit 820, or the variable display unit 80 may display an error message.

On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102: Yes), then an operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 is executed (S2107). . Next, it is determined whether the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 in S2107 has been completed (S2108). If it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has not been completed (S2108: No), the process of S2108 is looped until the operation confirmation process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has been completed (S2108: Yes), it is determined whether the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 has been confirmed in the process of S2107 (S2109). If the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed (S2109: Yes), the inner reel unit 810 is moved to the initial off-symbol row (S2110), and then the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the first position (S2110). (transparent area) (S2111), and this process ends.

In this way, by configuring to move each reel to its initial position after confirming the normality of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to immediately after the start-up process (see FIG. 139) This has the effect of allowing you to start playing. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if an abnormal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is found (S2109: No), an error command indicating the abnormal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is set (S2112), and this process ends. . An abnormality in the inner reel unit 810 is notified by the display lamp 34 similarly to the outer reel unit 820. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify abnormality of the inner reel unit 810, or the variable display unit 80 may display an error message.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2201 was executed (S2201), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S2202 to S2212 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S2212, the variable display setting process in S2213, and the like in a short cycle. By executing the process in S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S2213 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2203 to S2213 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2202 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208, which will be described later (S2203), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2204). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed.

Furthermore, when the power is restored from a power outage due to a power outage, etc., a production permission command based on the game being executed at the time of the power outage is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136). . The audio lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in this power-on notification process (S2204) based on the reception of the production permission command that includes the fact that the special symbol is in the process of variation, and then sends the display variation pattern command to the display control device. 114. The display control device 114 determines this fluctuation start command through a simple command determination process (see FIG. 118(b)), and executes a fluctuation display for power-on based on a fluctuation pattern based on the received command (see FIG. 118(b)). 82(b) or (c)). The display variation pattern command created here is for executing a simple variation display as described above, so it is simpler than the one selected in the variation pattern selection process (see Figure 146) described later. It is something. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for creating display variation pattern commands, and to notify the player that the power is on with a good response when recovering from a power outage.

In this control example, in addition to the variable display using the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the power is turned on, no matter which device is used to display the variable display, it is preferable to perform the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600. This eliminates the need to perform a reel operation that consumes a large amount of power due to motor operation after the power is turned on, so that a sudden increase in power consumption can be suppressed. Furthermore, even if the timing (remaining period) until the variable display is stopped is unknown, by using the 7-segment display section 1600, the third symbol to be stopped and displayed can be changed to any third symbol at the stop timing. can be made easier.

Further, after a production permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power cut is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136), the production permission command is executed based on the production permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on receiving this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received through a simple command determination process (see 118(b)), and changes the display mode based on the received command to the display mode when the power is turned on (see FIG. 82(b)). or (see (c))).

Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied to the variable display unit 80. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2205 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 is changed to an initial mode (for example, a mode in which the displacement member 670 is changed to the fourth position). Settings such as switching are performed, and the settings are sent to the display control device 114 as a command. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S2208), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination sections 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the variable display unit 80. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the variable display unit 80, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After the process of S2209, a performance execution management process is executed (S2210). In the performance execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the segment display device 600 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in this performance execution management process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S2209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for variable display performed by the variable display unit 80.

After the production execution management process, an operation control process for controlling the operations of the reels and displacement members is performed (S2211). Details of this operation control process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

After executing the operation control process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2212). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

Next, the process moves to S2213. In the process of S2213, a variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the variable display unit 80 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

When the variable display setting process (S2213) is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2216), and the power-off process is executed (S2217). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2218), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2215: No), the process returns to S2201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2215: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the variable display unit 80 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S2212), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by the main controller 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S2301). If a variation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to on (S2302), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command received this time (S2303), and this processing is ended. . The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 145) to be described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the variable display device unit 80 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern thereof.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2304). If the stop type command is received (S2304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) to be described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2304: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2307). When the number of reserved pitches command is received (S2307: Yes), it is determined whether the received number of reserved pitches command is the special number 1 reserved pitches command or the special number 2 reserved pitches command. , the value included in that command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2308). In addition, in the process of S2309, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is set. After completing the process in S2308, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is held. Since the signal is sent from the main controller 110 when a starting prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 by the process of S2308. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may change from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol. Even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, when a starting prize is detected or when a special symbol is drawn, can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Note that when the process of S2308 is executed, a display number of reserved balls command is issued to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c. Set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the variable display device unit 80.

In the process of S2307, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2307: No), then it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2309). In the process of S2309, if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2310: Yes), winning information (such as special symbol lottery results) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S2310), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S2309: No), it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot has been received (S2311). In the process of S2311, when a command related to the jackpot is received (S2311: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S2311), and this process ends. Commands related to jackpots include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, as the processing corresponding to the received command regarding the jackpot, there is, for example, processing for setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 143, the jackpot related process (S2312), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing (S2312). The jackpot-related process is a process for causing the variable display device unit 80 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won. Processes corresponding to various commands sent from are executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S2312), first, it is determined whether the jackpot-related command received in the command determination process (S2212) is a jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), and this process is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141). It is transmitted towards the variable display unit 80.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2403). If the number of rounds command is received (S2403: Yes), a number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S2404), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2403: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2405). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2405: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2405: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S2406), and the gaming state after the jackpot is read out from the gaming state storage area 223k (S2407). Next, a motion pattern corresponding to the information read in the process of S2407 is determined from the symbol motion table 222e (S2408). Specifically, after the end of the jackpot, the time saving or variable probability state is set, so the motion 2 is determined as the motion pattern from the symbol motion table 222e (see FIG. 124). Next, the variable display device unit operation corresponding to the operation mode determined in the process of S2408 is set (S2409), and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, in the variable probability or time saving state, the display mode is the segment display device 600 (see FIG. 110(b)). Since the fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 1 second or 2 seconds, if the operation pattern is set after the end of the jackpot, the outer reel unit 820 will be placed in the player's visible area from the start to the end of the fluctuation. There is a possibility that a problem may arise in which it is not possible to switch between the two areas 821a1 to 821c3. In this control example, by setting the operation pattern of the variable display device unit during the ending, the outer reel unit 820 can be switched by the end of the jackpot, and problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S2311: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2313). In the process of S2313, if it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2313: Yes), a process to stop the variable display being executed is executed (S2314), a display stop command is set (S2315), This process ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S2315 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted toward the variable display unit 80. When the variable display device unit 80 receives the display stop command, it stops the variable performance that is being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2313, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2313: No), it is determined whether or not a status command has been received (S2316). In the process of S2316, if it is determined that the status command has been received (S2316: Yes), the status setting process is executed (S2317), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the state setting process (S2317), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the state setting process (S2317). In the state setting process (S2317), the current gaming state is extracted from the command received from the main control device 110, and a process for setting the operation mode of the variable display unit 80 is executed.

In the state setting process (S2317), first, the current gaming state is extracted from the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (S2212) (S2501). Next, a symbol motion corresponding to the current gaming state is set using the symbol motion table 222e (S2502). The operating mode of the inner reel 811 is set (S2503), and the operating mode of the outer reel 821 is set (S2504). Next, the operating mode of the 7-segment display section 1600 is set (S2505). In this control example, as shown with reference to FIG. 124, the operation modes of the inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, and displacement member 670 differ depending on the corresponding gaming state, so the processing in S2503 to S2505 is Set the operation mode for each.

Next, it is determined whether the received status command is a command indicating transition to a time saving status (S2506). If it is determined that the command indicates a transition to the time saving state (S2506: Yes), the remaining time saving number counter 223g is set to 100 (S2507), and the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that the received status command is not a command indicating transition to the time saving status (S2506: No), the current gaming status is stored in the gaming status storage area 223k (S2508). , this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2316 that no status command has been received (S2316: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2318). ), return to main processing. If the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the variable display device unit 80, the command is transferred to the variable display device unit 80. A command is set to be sent to the unit 80.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2213). This variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is performed in the main process in order to execute a variable effect in the variable display unit 80. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2601: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2607. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is determined. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S2603).

Here, details of the variation pattern selection process (S2603) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S2603). In this variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern type according to the production mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the production counter 223j counted by the audio lamp control device 113. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the performance counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a long variation (S2702). In the process of S2702, if it is determined that the current change is a long change (S2702: Yes), the performance counter acquired in the process of S2701 is determined from the long change change pattern table 222a3 (see FIG. 123(b)). Based on the value of 223j, a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received in the process of S2303 of the command determination process (S2212) is determined (S2703). In the process of S2703, by setting a long variation variation pattern table, it is possible to perform a variation display according to each performance period of special reaches 1 to 3. Next, the process moves to S2707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that it is not a long fluctuation (S2702: No), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in a time saving mode (S2704). In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S2704: Yes), in the process of S2703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 142), the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command is Based on the type and performance counter 223j, a corresponding variation pattern is selected from the probability variable time saving medium variation pattern selection table 222a2 (S2705), and this processing is ended. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S2604 in FIG. 145).

On the other hand, in the process of S2704, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2704: No), the corresponding variation pattern is changed to the normal mode variation mode based on the extracted variation pattern type and the performance counter 223j. It is selected from the pattern selection table 222a1 (S2706), and the process moves to S2707. In this manner, by executing the variation pattern selection process (S2603), it is possible to perform variable display according to each production period (production mode).

Next, a production scenario corresponding to the variation pattern determined in any one of the processes of S2703, S2705, and S2706 is set (S2707), and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set based on the set production scenario (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time shortening counter 223g is 5 or more (S2709). If it is determined that the value of the remaining time shortening counter is 5 or more (S2709: Yes), the remaining number of times display processing is executed (S2710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time shortening counter 223g is less than 5 (S2709: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, details of the remaining number display process (S2710) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the remaining number of times display processing (S2710). This remaining number display process (S2710) is executed in the above-described variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146), and is a process for setting a command for displaying a short remaining time number on the segment display device 600.

In the remaining count display process (S2710), first, the specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON (S2801). Next, the value of the remaining time shortening counter 223g(n) is read out (S2802). Next, the value of n-1 is calculated (S2803). Next, it is determined whether the value of n-1 calculated in the process of S2803 is 0 (S2804). If it is determined that the value of n-1 is 0 (S2804: Yes), a display count command indicating "END" is set as the display mode of the count display period (1S) (S2805), and a specific remaining period is set. The flag 223h is set to OFF (S2806), and the process moves to S2808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that the value of N-1 is not 0 (S2804: No), the display mode of the count display period (1S) is the value of "n-1" calculated in the process of S2803. A display count command indicating the value is set (S2807), and the process moves to S2809.

In this control example, the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600 from the time when the change in the time saving state stops until the next change starts as described above (see FIG. 111(b)). . When the number of remaining time reductions is n, the remaining number of time reductions is displayed after the n-th fluctuation stops, so the number obtained by subtracting 1 from n becomes the remaining number of time reductions. In this control example, the remaining time shortening frequency is displayed after the fluctuation stops, but the remaining time shortening frequency may be displayed before the fluctuation starts.

After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, reading of the variation time of the variation pattern received this time is executed (S2808). Next, in the process of S2808, it is determined whether the read variation time is 1 second (S2809). If it is determined that it is 1 second (S2809: Yes), a process of rewriting the determined variation pattern to a shortening variation pattern is executed (S2810). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2809 that the variation time is not 1 second (S2809: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S2603 is completed, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the variable display unit 80 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S2603, and the command is sent to the variable display unit 80. (S2604). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the variable display unit 80 causes the variable display unit 80 to display the third symbol in a variable manner according to the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started. After completing the process of S2604, next, a preview selection process is executed to set a preview performance based on the validity determination result according to the current performance mode (S2605).

Here, details of the advance notice selection process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S2605). This preview selection process (S2605) is executed in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting a preview performance based on the validity determination result according to the current performance mode.

In the preview selection process (S2605), first, the performance counter 223j is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S2902). In the process of S2902, if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S2902: Yes), the winning/failure determination result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the value of the performance counter 223j are Based on this, the time-saving medium preview performance, which is a preview performance of the time-saving performance period, is selected (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2902, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2902: No), the success/failure determination result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the performance counter 223j are Based on the value, the normal preview performance which is the preview performance of the normal performance period is selected (S2905), and the process moves to S2906.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether the normal preview effect selected in the process of S2904 is a preview effect of shutter rotation (S2905). In the process of S2904, if it is determined that the selected normal preview performance is a shutter rotation preview performance (S2905: Yes), a shutter preview scenario is set (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the selected time preview effect is other than the shutter rotation preview effect (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2907. do.

When the process of S2903, S2905, or S2906 is finished, a display preview command indicating the selected preview effect is set (S2907), and this process ends. The display preview command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is variable during the command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted towards the display unit 80. When the variable display unit 80 receives the display preview command, the variable display unit 80 displays a preview effect according to the command on the variable display unit 80.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S2605 is finished, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S2606), and then it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2607: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607: Yes), a stop symbol setting process is executed (S2608).

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the stop symbol setting process (S2608), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2213), will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol setting process (S2608). The stop symbol setting process (S2608) executes a process for setting symbols to be stopped and displayed on the variable display unit 80 based on the current gaming state.

In the stop symbol setting process (S2608), first, the current gaming state is read out from the gaming state storage area 223k (S3401). The game state storage area 223k is set in the process of S2508 of the state setting process (see FIG. 144). Next, in the process of S3401, it is determined whether the read current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S3402). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not time saving (S3402: No), a normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) is executed, and the process moves to S3409.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608), will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403). The normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display unit 80 when the current gaming state is normal.

In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S3501). Next, reading of the stopped symbols stored in the stopped symbol storage area 223n is executed (S3502). Next, a display range that can be stopped and displayed is set based on the read out stop symbol (previous stop symbol) and the current variation (S3503). Next, a stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set from within the display range that can be stopped and displayed (S3504), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is time saving (S3402: Yes), it is determined whether the current change is a winning change (S3404). If it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S3404: Yes), a stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3405), and S3409 Shift to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation (S3404: No), it is determined whether the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406). If it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406: Yes), the value (n) of the remaining time shortening counter 223g is read out (S3407). Next, the stop symbols on the middle 7 segment display section 1600b are made different from the value of n-1, and the stop symbols are set using the symbol group B in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3408).

In this way, by setting the stop symbols and the remaining time shortening times to be different in the process of S3408, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving the stop symbols and the remaining time shortening times. Next, the set stop symbols are stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n (S3409), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is not on (S3406: No), a time saving stop symbol setting process is executed (S3410), S3409 is executed, and this process ends. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, the time-saving stop symbol setting process (S3410), which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608), will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410). The time-saving stop symbol setting process (S3410) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display device 600 when the current gaming state is in the time-saving mode.

In the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410), first, reading of information from the winning information storage area 223a is executed (S3601). Next, it is determined whether there is any hit information in the information read in the process of S3601 (S3602). If it is determined that there is no hit information in the read information (missing) (S3602: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g ( S3603).

As mentioned above, the symbols "2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9" are stored in the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (see FIG. 126), and these numerical symbols are , when displayed by the 7-segment display unit 1600, all the symbols are displayed using the light-emitting area 822. In this control example, the outer reel 821 is set in the player's viewing area in order to show the fluctuating results as a display mode on the 7-segment display section 1600 during the time saving. The display mode in 7 segments is also shown using the light emitting area 822. However, even when the light emitting region 822 is not emitting light, it can be recognized by the player, so there is a risk that the player may misunderstand it as a result of variation. In this control example, when showing the fluctuating result of losing, the player can clearly recognize the symbols by selecting a symbol that uses all the light emitting areas 822. In this control example, a pattern using the light emitting area 822 is always used as a losing pattern, but it may be configured so that a pattern indicating the previous fluctuation result is not used.

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the next variation is a hit (S3604: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using symbol group A in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3605 ). Numerical symbols "0, 1, 7" are stored in the symbol group A of the symbol group storage area 222g (see FIG. 126). As described above, in this control example, when showing a winning variation result during time saving, a symbol that always uses the light-emitting area 822 is displayed. However, when showing a winning variation result, the light-emitting area 822 822 is configured so as not to emit light. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the losing symbols and the winning symbols, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize them.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the next variation is not a hit (S3604: No), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3606), and the main Finish the process.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. After executing the stop symbol setting process (S2608), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2609), and a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. Then, settings are made to send the command to the display control device 114 (S2610). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this display stop type command, the variable display device unit 80 stops and displays a stop symbol according to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, details of the operation control process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the operation control process (S2211). This operation control process (S2211) is executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 141), and executes a process for controlling the variable display unit 80 according to the current production mode.

In the operation control process (S2211), first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001). If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3001: No), it is not the timing to control the variable display unit 80, and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001: Yes), an outer reel control process is executed (S3002).

Here, details of the outer reel control process (S3002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2211), will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the outer reel control process (S3002). This outer reel control process (S3002) executes a process for controlling the outer reels 821 according to the current production mode.

In the outer reel control process (S3002), first, it is determined whether the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101). If it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101: Yes), the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3102). Next, it is determined whether the set data is END data (S3103). If it is determined that the set data is not END data (S3103: No), motor data corresponding to the value of the performance counter 223j is set (S3104), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the set data is END data (S3104), the outer reel operation table setting area is reset (S3105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is not being set (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of operation of the outer reel unit 820. (S3106). If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of the operation of the outer reel unit 820 (S3106: Yes), the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation content is set (S3107), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not a value indicating the start of the outer reel operation (S3106: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 149, the explanation will be continued. After executing the outer reel control process (S3002), the inner reel control process (S3003) for controlling the inner reel unit 810 is executed. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the inner reel control process (S3003). The inner reel control process (S3202) differs from the above-mentioned outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) in that the processing target is simply changed from the outer reel unit 820 to the inner reel unit 810, so a detailed explanation thereof will be given below. Omitted.

After executing the inner reel control process (S3003), the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing details of the displacement member control process (S3004). The displacement member control process (S3004) differs from the above-mentioned outer reel control process (FIG. 150) in that the processing target is simply changed to the displacement member 670, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. After executing the displacement member control process (S3004), the value of the scenario counter 223i is then subtracted by 1 (S3005), and this process ends.

In this control example, the variable display unit 80 is configured to control the outer reel unit 820, the inner reel unit 810, and the displacement member 670 in this order, but the control order may be changed.

In this first control example, a configuration is used in which symbols (third symbols) imitating numbers (0 to 9) are displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600. It may be configured to display a pattern imitating the alphabet or characters using segments of the area 822 (including the area 822). In this case, for example, while performing a variable display using the inner reel 811, the displacement member 670 is varied to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is moved to the fourth position. In other words, during a period in which the player cannot (difficult) to see the inner reels 811 and the outer reels 821, each outer reel 821 is located in the second region (the region having the light emitting region 822). When the displacement member 670 returns to the initial position (first position), a variable display effect using the 7-segment display section 1600 is executed. By displaying symbols that imitate "S", "E", and "G" from the left of section 1600, the game player can indicate that a variable display of the third symbol will be executed on 7-segment display section 1600 in the middle of the variable display performance. It may be configured such that after displaying a variation start display mode to notify the user, a variation display effect using the 7-segment display section 1600 is executed.

In this way, the 7-segment display section 1600 is used to explain the content of the performance and notify the gaming state in addition to the variable display of the third symbol. Outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600), the display means that does not display the third symbol is used to notify the player of information regarding the game other than the special symbol lottery result. Since the amount of information that can be reported to the player during the display performance can be increased, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player even when a liquid crystal display device is not used.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 198. In the first control example described above, the variable display unit 80, that is, the reel display by the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, and the segment display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 are used as display means for showing the lottery results of special symbols. The pachinko machine 10 used was explained. On the other hand, this second control example is different in that a third symbol display device 81 using a liquid crystal display is used as a display means for showing the special symbol lottery results.

Furthermore, the second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the audio output control of the pachinko machine 10 is explained in detail. Specifically, in this second control example, the tempo (BPM (beats per minute)) of the fluctuating sound (BGM) that is output during the fluctuating display of the special symbol (during the fluctuating display of the third symbol) is variable. The stop sound of the third symbol is configured to be varied in accordance with the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) being played.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol in accordance with the BGM played at different tempos, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, which increases the production effect. can be increased.

First, with reference to FIG. 156, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 156 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 156, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the variable display unit 80 provided in the center of the game board 13 is replaced with a variable display unit 80. The difference is that a third symbol display device 81 is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in second control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be briefly described. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. This second control example is different from the first control example described above in the configuration of a device that receives various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, the difference is that various commands set by the audio lamp control device 113 can be output to the third symbol display device 81. The other configurations are the same as in the first control example described above, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the display control device 1140 of this second control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is connected to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 has a built-in RAM 303 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU 301 .

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesizer 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. Further, the audio data designated by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizer 306. For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to a stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3.

The voice synthesis section 306 is configured with a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier section 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier section 307 and input to the speaker section 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the audio lamp control device 113.

Note that in this second control example, the number of channels of the speech synthesis section is set in accordance with the speech data output from the speech lamp control device 113, but the number of channels of the speech synthesis section is not limited to this, for example, (For example, audio data for a jackpot game, audio data for a stop sound) may be output through the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to set the plurality of audio data to be output to the same channel as audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels that the audio output device has can be reduced, so product costs can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (sound data) used to output music, sound effects, etc. are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis section 306.

Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a stores music data (BGMA, BGMB) regarding music (BGM) and stop sound data (stop sound A, stop sound B) regarding stop sounds. In this control example, the music (BGM) can be executed with different tempos, and when setting different tempos for the same music, the same music data is used to set different tempos. It is configured to execute processing for varying the data playback speed (see S9211 in FIG. 196). With this configuration, there is no need to store music data corresponding to each tempo, so the amount of storage in the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, the RAM 303 includes at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing audio files (music data group) corresponding to the sounds to be played (BGM, stop sounds, etc.). By reproducing the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, one music piece is played back. This music data group storage area 303a contains commands (voice BGM commands) output from the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct playback of music, or playback of the stop sound of the display symbol (third symbol). When a command (sound stop sound command) output for instructing is received, a music data group corresponding to the music instructed by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a and stored ( (See S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 196).

Further, in this control example, a music data group (audio file) is stored for each type of audio to be reproduced. In other words, the audio file used when playing BGM and the audio file used when playing stop sound are stored separately, and the audio to be played is output for each read audio file. It is configured to do so. Then, each audio file is output to a different channel.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data is currently being played out of the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a. The music pointer 303b has a value set to "00H" when a music playback instruction is given (an audio BGM command is received) (see S9212 in FIG. 196). Additionally, along with this, reproduction of BGM audio data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set.

In this control example, a plurality of pointer values are set for one song. ”, etc., pointer values are set corresponding to the characters. Thereby, it is possible to easily change the point at which playback of a particular piece of music is started, depending on the value of the pointer that is initially set.

For example, when playing a song, the value of the song pointer 303b that is initially set, the update order of the song pointer 303b, the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is set, the game state that is set, It may be configured to vary depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, when the same song is played, depending on where the song was played or the arrangement of the song (for example, an arrangement that transitions from "A melody" to "Chorus 1"), Since the game content can be suggested to the player, it is possible to make the player interested in the sound output from the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if the playback of the stop sound is instructed to match the stop timing of the third symbol (an audio stop sound command is received), the pointer value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is played is set. (See S9206 in FIG. 196).

The value of this music pointer 303b is updated by 1 each time the reproduction of one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. Further, when the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music and the pointer value is further updated, the value is updated to "00H". That is, when the song is played to the end, the song is played again from "A Melody".

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. Therefore, when storing a song data group in the song data group storage area 303a and setting the playback of the song, the song pointer 303b corresponding to the song to be played is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. The maximum value of is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 196).

The music timer 303d is a timer that measures the playback time of music data that is being played. Each time the music timer 303d is set to play new music data, a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the music data is set. Note that the playback time of each song data is defined in the song data group storage area 303a in association with the type of song data. While the music is being played, it is determined whether the playback time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown in the drawing, this music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

Note that in this second control example, the number of channels of the speech synthesis section is set in accordance with the speech data output from the speech lamp control device 113, but the number of channels of the speech synthesis section is not limited to this, for example, (For example, audio data for a jackpot game and audio data for a stop sound) may be output through the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to set the plurality of audio data to be output to the same channel as audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels that the audio output device has can be reduced, so product costs can be reduced.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (starting winning), the variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. Ru. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 14-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 1140, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display of the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display will be made accordingly. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 159(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 159(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is constructed to imitate the numbers "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern imitating an animal and a number from ``1'' to ``9'' attached thereto.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a jackpot, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and after the fluctuating display ends, the jackpot is hit. is configured to occur. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 3/4 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner; Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling in the left and right direction for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, middle vertical line, and right vertical line of this main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line going down to the right and a diagonal line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, third symbols are stopped and displayed on active lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbol corresponds to a jackpot (if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is one). Furthermore, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss, and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display, a fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will start. . In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player shoots balls continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is rare that no ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing the game and is not playing any games with the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the third ball corresponding to the new ball entering the A variable display of symbols is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a laterally elongated manner below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. . In this control example, while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing a variable display based on a special symbol lottery, the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. When a winning ball is won, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of four times in each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37, and the sub display area Ds It is also shown in the small area Ds1. The number of pending symbols displayed in this sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of pending balls whose variable display is currently pending. In addition, in this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to be reserved, and the player is informed of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In order to make it easy to understand, the display manner of the first reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the display manner of the second reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed differently. It is configured to do so.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 159(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 159(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, three main symbols and three sub-symbols are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. It shows the lottery results of special symbols. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, a variable display of three third symbols in a simple manner consisting only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, the jackpot starts when three third symbols composed of the same numbers are stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, the entire main display area Dm is used to display a highly effective variable display ( The main variable display) is configured to execute a variable display (sub variable display) that is smaller than the main variable display in the small area Dm1 of the main controller 110. As a result, for example, even if a decorative movable member provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the execution is performed in the small area Dm1. The sub-variable display allows the player to be reliably informed of the lottery results of the special symbols.

Also, for example, in the main fluctuation display, a part of the third symbol combination to indicate winning the jackpot is displayed in a reach state (with two symbol rows of three symbol rows having stopped fluctuating). ), and even when temporarily erasing the main variable display in order to greatly vary the aspect of the performance executed in the main display area Dm, it is possible to leave only the sub-variable display in the small area Dm1. , it is possible to make the player understand that the special symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner.

In this control example, the display position of the small area Dm1 is fixed above the center position of the main display area Dm, but the position where the small area Dm1 is formed may be configured to be variable. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that it can be varied depending on whether the movable decorative member is movable or not, and the performance mode executed in the main variable display. Furthermore, the size of the small area Dm1 may be varied, or a period may be provided during which only either the sub-variation display or the main variation is executed.

In the sub-area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the first reserved symbol imitating a bird's face is displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the second reserved symbol imitating an egg is displayed in the second reserved symbol. The same number of special symbols as the number of reserved balls will be displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are shown to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a preview effect is sometimes performed such as a reserved symbol making a special movement or another character appearing.

In addition, in this control example, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

The display control device 1140 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance. Here, details of the display control device 1140 will be explained with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of display control device 1140. The display control device 1140 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 1140 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 1140 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 1140 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 1140. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 234d of extremely small capacity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next one frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 1140, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 1140 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 also transfers the data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply section 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 180).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 1140 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 1140 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 1140 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 161(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 1140 executes the display control device 1140 as shown in FIG. 161(b). As shown in FIG. 161(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 161(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 161(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 161(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 1140 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 is detected, 161(b) and 161(c) are drawn alternately using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the three symbols on the symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be displayed instantly.

Returning to FIG. 160, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 162(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to back surface A corresponding to "town stage." . Further, FIG. 163 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 162, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is determined to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface type. First, a region between position a and position a' of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 163, the back image on the back surface E changes to the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... in FIG. 163 as time passes. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 163(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 163(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 163(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 163(a) is returned to, and the back images shown in FIGS. 163(a) to 163(c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By having all of them reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 1140 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are partial areas of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 162(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In addition, the image data corresponding to the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 163(a) and corresponds to the rear surface images between FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) excluding FIG. 163(b) after the power is turned on. During the start-up process, the image data is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and becomes resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 163(a) to 163(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed as time passes. It can be displayed while Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 163(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 163(b) to 163(c) and FIGS. 163(c) to 163(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range from ~(b) is set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 163(a) to (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 163(b) to (c) and FIGS. 163(c) to (a) can be Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) can be displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 163(b) to 163(c) to 163(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. be able to.

Note that, on the rear surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 160) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 160, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 159(b)), numbered from "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. Ru. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the variable performance is not started immediately.

Further, image data corresponding to main symbols to which numbers "1" to "9" are not attached is also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "woman" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is permanently resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 1140 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes the character design from the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 1140 is notified by an error command. Furthermore, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 1140 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 1140 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 1140 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a storage image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a jackpot A to F. If either is the case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpot types are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 164 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 1140 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy load on the system, the processing capacity of the display control device 1140 is limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is prepared for the display data table that is prepared for each production. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 165). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 165 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 165, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 165, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 1140 transmits display data in response to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 161(a) to 161(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 180). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 192(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 182(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 192(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 182(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 166), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 1140.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 167, which will be described later, various sprites are used to create a vertical scrolling display screen (vertical scrolling display data group) and a horizontal scrolling display screen (horizontal scrolling display data group). ) and various sprites for creating a display screen (common display data) commonly used in vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Here, in the drawing list of this control example, as shown in FIG. 166, the first sprite to be drawn is the sprite related to the vertical scroll display data group, then the sprite related to the horizontal scroll display data group, and finally the common display data It is configured to be a sprite related to The back image of the horizontal scrolling display data group (the image placed furthest to the back side of the horizontal scrolling display data group) is the image of the vertical scrolling display data group created on the back side of the back image. It is set so that the person cannot be seen.

As a result, when a horizontal scroll display is being executed, the vertical scroll display formed on the back side of the display data related to the horizontal scroll display is not displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the player is to see the vertical scroll display, a process (transparent processing) is executed in which all the sprites of the horizontal scroll display data group are displayed transparently. The vertical scroll display formed on the back side is configured so that the player can see it.

In this way, multiple variable display modes are always drawn, and by varying the variable display mode that is displayed so that the player can see it depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met, it is possible to provide a variety of options for the player. Since it is possible to provide a variable display mode, the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since multiple variable display modes are always created, for example, even if the variable display mode is configured to vary according to the player's operations, the variable display mode can be smoothly changed. .

Furthermore, in this control example, as described above, a common display (for example, a reserved ball symbol display) that is displayed in common both when the vertical scroll display is executed and when the horizontal scroll display is executed. Since it is formed at the frontmost side, a common display can be performed without being influenced by other display data (regardless of whether or not transparency processing is performed on horizontal scroll display data).

Note that in this control example, the drawing list is created by completely separating data for vertical scroll display and data for horizontal scroll display, but data for vertical scroll display and data for horizontal scroll display are For sprites that can be shared (for example, effects), write that information only in the display data on the front side (horizontal scroll side), and when changing the scroll direction, draw the sprite (for example, effects). It may also be configured such that only the display position coordinates of the sprites (sprites) are varied to values corresponding to the scroll direction. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list.

As described above, in this control example, vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display are configured to be settable as variable display modes for displaying the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (one liquid crystal display), By configuring the image data for displaying each variation display mode to be created in parallel, even if it is not determined which variation display mode to display at the start of variation of the third symbol ( For example, even if the variable display mode to be displayed is changed based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the variable display of the third symbol), the variable display mode can be smoothly changed. However, in addition to this configuration, a configuration may be used in which the variable display mode can be smoothly varied by creating image data regarding a plurality of variable display modes in parallel.

Furthermore, in this control example, the configuration is such that different variable display modes can be executed without changing the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Display area shielding means (for example, movable object, light guide plate, organic EL), and when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when a specific variation pattern is set), the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is varied, and the variable It may also be configured to set a variable display mode corresponding to the display area.

In this way, when the size of the display area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is varied and the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display area is set, the third symbol is displayed in the same direction. To make it easier to reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list because even if the variable display mode to be varied is set in correspondence with the display area, the player can be made to think that a different variable display is being executed. I can do it.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 182 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 193). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 1140 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 194).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 182(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

Next, the contents of image display in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on the drawing list. As shown in FIG. 167, this control example is configured so that one display image is created by overlapping images (layers) in the order of type shown in the drawing list explained with reference to FIG. A common display data group (common layer group) for displaying common information such as the number of pending balls symbols and error symbols is formed at the frontmost side (player side), and at the back is a horizontal scrolling display data group. (horizontal scroll layer group) is formed, and a vertical scroll display data group (vertical scroll layer group) is formed at the innermost side.

Furthermore, the configuration is such that transparency processing (processing to make all color information colorless) can be applied to all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group. According to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, normally, the back image formed at the innermost position of the horizontal scroll layer group is used to create an image further back, that is, for vertical scrolling. To make the various images displayed invisible to the player, and to perform transparency processing on all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the player operates the frame button 22). This allows the player to visually recognize the vertical scrolling display that was displayed further back (rearward) than the horizontal scrolling layer group.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the performance executed by the third symbol display device will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen using variable display layer 1 (horizontal scroll layer group), and FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen using variable display layer 2 (vertical scroll layer group). FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using a group of 3.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the third symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner by horizontal scrolling, and during horizontal scrolling, the third symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 159(a). , the third symbol is variably displayed using five active lines (V1 to V5) in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol.

During this horizontal scroll display, if the player operates the frame button 22 when the reach state (so-called double reach state) is reached on the active lines V4 and V5 (see FIG. 168(a)), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168(b). As shown in FIG. 168(b), in the vertical scroll display, only one active line is displayed, and the main symbols imitating the numbers "2" and "3" in the horizontal scroll display are displayed. The display switches from the double reach state to the reach state with only the number "3".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, it is more advantageous for the player if the main symbols imitating odd numbers line up to result in a jackpot than if the main symbols imitating even numbers line up to result in a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 168(a), during horizontal scrolling display, the player does not know which main symbol will cause a jackpot until the main symbol stops, and as shown in FIG. However, by switching to the vertical scrolling display shown in FIG. 168(b), it is possible to notify the player that in the event of a jackpot, it will likely be an advantageous jackpot, giving the player a sense of security. can give.

In this way, by switching to a variable display with different scrolling directions and varying the number of active lines of the main symbol, the content of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol can be varied, thereby preventing players from getting bored. It is possible to provide games that are not available. Note that this control example is configured to provide different variable display modes by reducing the number of effective lines by varying the scrolling directions; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by varying the scrolling directions, The number of effective lines may be increased by increasing the number of effective lines. In this case, although the display is not in the ready-to-reach state during normal horizontal scrolling display, it may be configured such that the ready-to-reach state is entered by switching to the vertical scrolling display. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while maintaining the expectation of a jackpot until the variable display ends.

Further, in this control example, the method for establishing the switching condition for switching the scroll direction is defined as the player operating the frame button 22; however, the method is not limited to this; It may be configured so that the scroll direction is always switched when the scroll direction is set, or it may be configured such that the scroll direction is not changed by the player operating the frame button 22.

In addition, in this control example, the display control device 1140 is configured to create both a variable display image for horizontal scrolling and a variable display image for vertical scrolling, so it is difficult to determine when the switching conditions are set. Even if it is established, the scrolling direction can be changed immediately, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, as a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of one special symbol, a variation pattern for horizontal scroll display and a variation pattern for vertical scroll display are set, and a display image is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the main symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state in one scroll display, the main symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state in the other scroll display. The screen may be continuously displayed, and the effect image during the jackpot game may be displayed on the other scroll display side. With this configuration, the current jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed by operating the frame button 22 and switching the display screen at any timing during the jackpot game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one scroll display performs a variable display to show the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the other scroll display displays the lottery result of the first special symbol. It may be configured to perform a variable display to show the lottery result of the second special symbol on the display.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the direction of variation of the third symbol is switched when the display screen showing the variation display is switched. The configuration is not limited to the configuration of this control example as long as the configuration is such that the notification is made at the same time.For example, a fluctuating display for showing the lottery result of a jackpot with a combination of three symbols is executed on one display screen, The other display screen may be configured to show the jackpot lottery result with only one symbol in a static display mode, or one display screen may display a fluctuating display mode imitating the reels, and the other display screen may show a jackpot lottery result. It may be configured such that a variable display mode imitating 7 segments is executed.

Furthermore, although this control example uses a configuration in which two display screens can be displayed in one liquid crystal display device, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two liquid crystal display devices may be arranged in an overlapping manner, and the liquid crystal display It may be configured to switch to different variable display modes by variably operating the device.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the mode of the special symbol confirmation stop sound in this second control example will be described. As will be described later, in this second control example, two types of BGM, BGMA and BGMB, are set as BGM to be output during the period in which the special symbols are varied. In the audio lamp control device 113, at the timing when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is output from the main controller 110 and received by the audio lamp controller 113), the value of the audio effect counter 223ab, which will be described later, is set. is acquired, and the type of BGM is determined based on the acquired value and the special symbol lottery result (hit or loss). The type of BGM determines not only the content of the BGM (BGMA, BGMB) but also the tempo of the BGM.

In this embodiment, even if the BGM is the same, by varying the output tempo, it is possible to make the player feel as if a variety of BGM is being output, and it is possible to prevent the problem of early boredom with the game. . Furthermore, by varying the tempo of the BGM, even if the same variation pattern is displayed (dynamic display), different variation patterns will be executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output accordingly. It is possible to make the user think of a variety of variations in the special design.

Here, the fluctuation of the special symbols mainly involves after the fluctuation display (scroll display) of all symbol rows has started, the symbols are scrolled at high speed, and then the symbols are displayed in the order predetermined by the fluctuation pattern. After each symbol row sequentially changes from a high-speed scrolling state to a low-speed scrolling display state, it is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in an example consisting of three symbol rows, the left, middle, and right symbol rows are scrolled at high speed, then the left symbol row is scrolled at a low speed, and then the right symbol rows are scrolled at a low speed. After the row and middle symbol row are in a low speed scrolling state, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed. After that, after the stopped left, middle, and right symbols enter a swinging fluctuation state (a state in which they are displayed slightly fluctuating up and down at a predetermined period) indicating that they are temporarily stopped, the fluctuation period has passed and the main Based on the reception of the confirmation command output from the control device 110, a confirmation stop display (stationary display) is performed.

Here, at the timing when each symbol row changes from being scrolled to being displayed in a stopped state, a sound effect called a symbol stop sound (for example, darn) is output to inform the player that the symbols are being displayed in a stopped state. It is output separately from BGM. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the symbols have been stopped in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can be informed of what kind of judgment result the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row will indicate. It can make you look forward to it.

However, as in this control example, by using various types of BGM or changing the tempo of the BGM, it is possible to change the state in which the BGM is output at the timing of the symbol stop, or the tempo and the symbol stop sound. There is a possible problem that the music does not match the music and gives the player a sense of discomfort. Specifically, by outputting a slow-tempo symbol stop sound even though the tempo was fast-paced BGM, the BGM and the stop sound did not match, causing an unnatural feeling as a special symbol fluctuating effect, or causing a special There may be a problem that the BGM that was being output at the timing when the symbols stop stops, resulting in the BGM becoming dull. In addition, in this control example, the variation period of the special symbol (the variation period of the variation pattern) is set in various ways, but the BGM to be output is such that music (song or phrase) that is shorter than the period is repeatedly output. , the music is configured to be output in the required output period. With this configuration, the BGM that is being output does not always have a sharp timing when the symbols stop, which tends to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, in this control example, the type of stop sound to be outputted is changed and outputted depending on the tempo and type of BGM being outputted. This makes it possible to output a symbol stop sound that matches the tempo and type of BGM, and is configured to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player at the symbol stop timing.

Referring to FIG. 169, an example in which tempo 120 (BPM 120) of BGMA is selected as the BGM to be output when variation pattern A (12 seconds) is executed and an example in which tempo 80 (BPM 80) is selected. The stop sounds that are output will be explained by comparing them. In the variation pattern A, the left symbol row is stopped 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol row is stopped 10 seconds later, and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed 12 seconds later.

As shown in FIG. 169, BGMA (tempo 120) is composed of BGM in which four quarter notes are played in 2 seconds per bar, and the one bar is controlled to be repeatedly output. In BGMA (tempo 120), one quarter note is output every 0.5 seconds (one quarter note is played every 0.5 seconds). In BGMA (tempo 120), stop sound A is set to be output as the stop sound. The stop sound A is configured so that an eighth note stop sound is output at a tempo of 120, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the stop sound B is composed of a sound such as "dah, dat", and is configured to be output for about 0.5 seconds in total. Here, in BGMA (tempo 120), as shown in FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b), at the timing of 8 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the output of the quarter note indicated by α1 is actually started. However, since this is the output timing of the stop sound, that sound is not output, but the stop sound A is output. In this way, in reality, due to BGMA (tempo 120), the BGM output stops at the timing when the sound corresponding to the quarter note is output, but at that timing, the output of the eighth note of stop note A is started, the player can be made to feel that the stop sound A is being output in synchronization with the timing at which the sound is actually output, and the sense of discomfort can be reduced. Similarly, at the right symbol row stop timing 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation, stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α2 is output in the BGM, and at the middle symbol row stop timing 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Then, stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α3 is output.

In this way, with BGMA (tempo 120), a short 2-second bar of music is repeatedly output, which causes players to quickly memorize the music pattern and become conscious of the type of sound that will be output next. However, at the symbol stop timing, the stop sound A is output in accordance with the sound output timing set in the BGM, so it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM becomes unclear. In addition, after the stop sound A is output at the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol, the BGM output is configured to be output in accordance with the elapse of time. Specifically, the BGM reproduction process continues even when the symbols are stopped, and the BGM output channel is set to mute during the period when the stop sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in BGMA (tempo 80), the content of one bar, similar to BGMA (tempo 120), is output to be played in 3 seconds. At the stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, in BGMA (tempo 80), it is not the timing at which a new note is output, but the timing at which the previously set note continues to be output. In the BGM of BGMA (tempo 80), the timing at which the sound corresponding to the new note (β1) is actually output is 8.25 seconds after the start of the change. Here, in BGMA (tempo 80), as shown in FIG. 169(c), the configuration is such that stop sound B composed of triplets is output based on the left symbol stop timing 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation. has been done. Since this stop sound B is output at a tempo of 80, a new note sound is output after 0.25 seconds, and then a sound corresponding to the new note is output after 0.25 seconds. With this configuration, the sound corresponding to the note in stop sound B ( The second note of the triplet) is output, so even if the note that was supposed to be output at BGMA (tempo 80) is not output due to the output of stop sound B, it will be output at that timing due to stop sound B. Since the sound is output, the discomfort felt by the player can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 169(c), in the stop sound B that is output at the stop timing of the right symbol row 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the sound in stop sound B is output (the third in the triplet The timing at which the note β2) is output matches the output timing of the sound corresponding to the note β2, which is output 10.5 seconds after the start of the change in the BGMA (tempo 80). It is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort. Furthermore, at the stop timing of the middle symbol row 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the output timing of the musical note in BGMA (tempo 80) and the output timing of stop sound B match, so there is a sense of discomfort in the output of the stop sound. can be suppressed.

In this way, even when the BGM tempo is changed and output, the stop sound that matches the tempo change is selected and output, so it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. In addition, even if the tempo of the BGM is played back by changing it flexibly through a lottery, etc., the stop sound can be set to match the standard tempo by converting and outputting the stop sound according to the change in tempo. By doing so, it is possible to easily configure the system to output a matching stop sound.

In addition, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable, the BGM with the tempo that is likely to be selected in the case of a win is output, allowing the player to judge whether it is a win or not. It is possible to give an early expectation that the result will be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 170, regarding the output contents of various sounds for variation pattern B (18 seconds variation) in which a different variation time is set from variation pattern A (12 seconds variation) described above with reference to FIG. 169. Give an explanation. FIG. 170(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of variation pattern B (18 seconds variation), and FIG. 170(b) shows each timing chart when BGMA is reproduced for variation pattern B. FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing the output timing of each sound, and FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing the output timing of each sound when BGMB is played for variation pattern B. be.

As shown in FIG. 170(b), when variation pattern B with a variation time of 18 seconds is set, the stop timing of each symbol row is set at a different timing from variation pattern A with a variation time of 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 170(a), the left symbol row stops 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol row stops 16 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the middle symbol row stops 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation. is set to . In addition, the stop timing of each symbol row is set in response to each variation when the variation time is different, or when the performance mode to be executed is different even if the variation time is the same, The stop timing shown in FIG. 170(a) is just an example. In addition, the order in which the symbol rows are stopped and the intervals at which each symbol row is stopped are set according to the performance mode to be executed. For example, multiple symbol rows may be stopped at the same time, It may be configured to be stopped based on the person operating the operating means (frame button 22).

According to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), the timing at which each symbol row stops is different from the example shown in FIG. 169(b), but similar to the example shown in FIG. 169(b), A stop sound A (beamed eighth note) can be output (played) in accordance with the stop timing of each symbol row.

In this way, by setting the type and tempo of the stop sound that is output (played) in accordance with the stop timing of the symbol row, based on the content (rhythm) of the BGM being played and the playback speed (tempo), It is possible to play a stop sound that matches both the beat timing of the BGM being played and the stop timing of the symbol row, creating a visual and sound production that gives players a sense of unity. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the type of stop sound is determined in accordance with the content (rhythm) of the BGM being played, and then the tempo of the stop sound is varied. The playback timing (beat timing) may be configured to match both the beat timing of the BGM being played and the stop timing of the symbol row.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 170(c), if the timing of the BGM beats and the timing of the stop sound perfectly match, the configuration may be such that both sounds are output. In this case, only when it is determined that there is a slight lag between the timing of the BGM and the timing of the stop sound, a mute process is executed to mute the BGM audio. Just configure it. As a result, only when the timing of the beat of the BGM and the timing of the beat of the stop sound perfectly match, it is possible to output emphasized audio without damaging the rhythm of the audio being played. It is possible to emphasize and notify that the symbol has stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170(c), BGMB is configured to repeatedly play a rhythm using eighth note triplets instead of quarter notes in BGMA. As the stop sound (stop sound B) corresponding to Set.

Then, in time with the timing when the left symbol row stops (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), stop sound B is played, and BGMB beats β1 and β2 that overlap with stop sound B (γ1, γ2) are set to mute. do. In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), it is determined that the output timings of the beat after beat β2 of the BGM and the beat after beat γ2 of stop sound B completely match. , and is configured to output (emphasize output) audio for any beat. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the left symbol row has stopped in an easy-to-understand manner in accordance with the tempo of the BGMB.

Similarly, at the timing when the right symbol row stops (16 seconds after the start of fluctuation), beats β3 and β4 of BGMB that overlap with beats γ3 and γ4 of stop sound B are set to mute, and the beats between them are set to mute. Emphasize output. Finally, when the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed (when the variable display period ends), the BGM playback ends at the timing when the variable display period ends, but it is set according to the type of BGM. Since the stop sound B (triplet) is output after the end of the variable display period, that is, during the fixed period, it may seem as if the BGM is being played even after the variable display period ends. can be set.

In addition, in this control example, the reproduction of BGM is started based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and is configured to end the reproduction of BGM at the fluctuation stop timing (timing when the fixed period is reached). As a result, the playback position of the BGM at the special symbol fluctuation start timing can be kept constant, so it is easy to determine the stop timing of each symbol row and the type of BGM being executed at the special symbol fluctuation start timing. This can simplify the process for setting the stop sound, but as an alternative configuration, a configuration that always plays a specific BGM in a loop regardless of the fluctuation status of the special symbol can be used. It's okay. In this case, means for determining the stop timing of each symbol row corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set this time at the special symbol fluctuation start timing, and means for determining the playback position of the BGM being played at the special symbol fluctuation start timing. It is preferable that the type of stop sound is set after determining the reproduction status of the BGM around the stop timing of each symbol row.

Further, it may be configured such that the type of BGM or the tempo of the BGM is varied during the variation of the special symbols. In this case, the timing to set the type of stop sound is not when the special symbol starts changing, but at a predetermined time when the stop timing of each symbol row arrives (the BGM cannot be changed again before the stop timing arrives). It is only necessary to perform processing to determine the type and tempo of the BGM that is being played back (for a certain period of time). Thereby, it is possible to smoothly respond to sudden changes in BGM.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls determining means for determining the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the determination result of the determining means determine that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), In a pachinko machine configured to easily set a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time is set than when it is determined that the number of balls is less than a predetermined number, the tempo of BGM played depending on the number of balls on hold is changed, specifically. The configuration may be such that fast-tempo BGM is more likely to be set when there are a large number of balls on hold.

Furthermore, in this control example, the type of stop sound that is outputted as a sound in response to the stop timing of the third symbol is selected from predetermined data defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a BGM discriminating means for discriminating the tempo and rhythm of the BGM to be reproduced may be provided, and a stop sound may be created in accordance with the discrimination result of the BGM discriminating means. In this case, for example, the beat set for the stop sound is set according to the rhythm of the BGM (for example, a 2-beat stop sound, a 3-beat stop sound), and the stop sound set according to the tempo of the BGM is played. All you have to do is execute the process to set the speed. In addition, the output period of the stop sound may be varied depending on the determination result of the BGM determining means.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the stop sound and BGM overlap at the stop timing of the third symbol, the stop sound is configured to be output with priority over the BGM, but other configurations For example, there may be provided a validity determining means for determining the lottery result of the current special symbol, and a variable means for varying the setting of the audio output when the determination result of the validity determining means is determined to be a jackpot. When the setting of the audio output is varied by the variable means, the BGM may be output with priority over the stop sound. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop sound from being output at the timing at which the stop sound is normally output, that is, at the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that is different from usual and gives a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, in order to output only one of the sounds when the stop sound and BGM overlap, a process is executed to mute the other sound, but the invention is not limited to this. The overlapping sounds may be synthesized and output. In this case, it is preferable to provide a determining means for determining whether or not to synthesize the overlapping sounds according to the lottery results of the special symbols. Thereby, the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol depending on whether or not the duplicate voices are synthesized.

In addition, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a time clock means (e.g., RTC) having a backup power supply that can continue to measure the current time is provided, and the time clock means measures a predetermined time (e.g., noon). ) is timed, in a pachinko machine 10 that is provided with a time production execution means that can execute a specific time production, one stop sound from a group of stop sounds corresponding to BGM played during the time production. It may be configured so that it can be set. In this case, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 with the same specifications are installed side by side, the pachinko machines 10 are manufactured so that the stop sounds set from the same stop sound group are different for adjacent pachinko machines 10. The stop sound may be configured to be set differently depending on the number.

With this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously play the same BGM to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by time production, and furthermore, it is possible to play back the same BGM in different ways (for example, scale, rhythm, Since the stop sound (tempo, period) can be played on an adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a realistic audio performance that is difficult to achieve with a single pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which variable times (variable patterns) of different lengths are set depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol is not displayed until the first predetermined period elapses. When each fluctuation pattern is configured to perform high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation that cannot stop and display the third symbol) and then perform low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol (low-speed fluctuation that can stop and display the third symbol) Regardless of the length of the set fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern is set so that the period of slow fluctuation is constant, and the above-mentioned stop sound and BGM processing are executed. You may do so. In this case, it is preferable to determine the BGM for low-speed fluctuation at the timing of switching from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and to determine the type of stop sound based on the determined BGM.

By configuring in this way, even if it is possible to set variation patterns with multiple different variation times, the stop timing of the third symbol can be made common, so the stop sound and BGM can be set. Processing can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, processing is explained that targets BGM and stop sound as multiple sounds output by the pachinko machine 10, but the output timing and output of other sounds are not limited to this. The aspect may also be adjustable. Specifically, the type of sound (operation sound) that is output when the frame button 22 is operated is varied according to the type of BGM being played, or the type of sound is adjusted to match the timing of the beat of the BGM being played. The output timing of the operation sound may be adjusted, or the abnormal sound that notifies the pachinko machine 10 of an abnormality may be set so that the beat of the abnormal sound is different from the beat of the audio being played. It may be configured so that Thereby, it is possible to prevent the beat of the abnormal sound from being absorbed into the beat of the BGM being played by the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing the player from missing the fact that the abnormal sound is being output.

<About the electrical configuration of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. This second control example is different from the first control example described above in that a variable pattern 2 table 202aa is used instead of the variable pattern table 202d, and other than that, the second control example is the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 172(a), the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is different from the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) of the first control example described above in that it includes a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1. There is a difference. This losing (probable) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 selects a variation pattern when a probability variable state and a time saving state in which the special symbol is a shortening variation are set as the game state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. This is a data table that is referenced at times, and defines fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times based on the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the determined stop type.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172(b), the contents of the deviation (probability variable) fluctuation pattern 2 table 202aa1 will be explained. FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1. As shown in FIG. 172(b), if the stop type for indicating the special symbol lottery result is "completely missed" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", "Short miss (12 seconds)" is selected, and if the range is from "191 to 198", "miss (18 seconds)" is selected. Then, if the stop type is "Reach" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", "Normal reach various types (30 seconds)" is selected, and if it is "191 to 197" ``Various types of super reach (60 seconds)'' is selected, and when the value is ``198'', ``various types of special reach (90 seconds)'' is selected.

Here, when "short miss (12 seconds)" or "miss (18 seconds)" is selected, the BGM and stop sound setting process described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170 is executed. . In addition, in FIG. 169 and FIG. 170 described above, the setting process of BGM and stop sound was explained as an example when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, but when other fluctuation patterns are set, A similar setting process is also executed.

When various fluctuation patterns are selected with reference to the deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern 2 table 202aa1, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the fluctuation pattern is set, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands. be done. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it sets an effect mode to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the received variation pattern command.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. In the second control example, the target (device) for performing the variable display of the third symbol whose operation is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example described above. Specifically, in the first control example described above, the variable display unit 80 is used to variably display the third symbol, whereas in the second control example, the third symbol is displayed using the third symbol display device 81. The difference is that three symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Here, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 173(a). FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 173(a), the ROM 222 of the second control example has an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, and a special effect. The difference is that the scenario table 222f and the symbol group storage area 222g have been deleted, and the BGM type selection table 222aa and the stop sound selection table 222ab have been added. Furthermore, there is a difference in that the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a are made to correspond to various presentation modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that the specific contents (contents indicating performance modes) specified in the variation pattern selection table 222a are the same as those of a well-known gaming machine using a liquid crystal display device, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The BGM type selection table 222aa is a data table for selecting BGM to be played during the variable display of the third symbol, which is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 174(a), in this control example, different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) and , different tempos (80 BPM, 120 BPM) are selected.

Specifically, if the success/failure determination result is "win (jackpot)" and the value of the audio production counter 223ab is in the range of "0 to 69", "BGMA (BPM 120)" is selected as the BGM. If the range is "70 to 89", "BGMA (BPM80)" is selected, and if the range is "90 to 99", "BGMB (BPM120)" is selected. are doing.

Then, if the validity judgment result is "miss" and the value of the audio production counter 223ab is in the range of "0 to 89", "BGMA (BPM80)" is selected and the value in the range of "90 to 99" is selected. In this case, "BGMA (BPM120)" is selected.

That is, in this second control example, the BGM type and tempo played during the variable display are configured to be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, there is BGM (BGMB (BPM120)) that is selected only when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, and BGM that is more likely to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. (BPM120)). With this configuration, the player can predict the lottery result of the current special symbol based on the BGM played during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol). It is possible to make the person interested not only in the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also in the sound output from the sound output device 226.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fast-tempo BGM is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. This can increase the sense of excitement for the player. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the remaining period of the time saving state is determined as a factor when selecting BGM, and the selection ratio of BGM types is varied based on the determination result. Specifically, if it is determined that the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining number of time reductions) is 10 or more, BGM with a slow tempo is likely to be selected. ) is determined to be less than 10 times, the configuration is such that fast-tempo BGM is more likely to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to use the audio to inform the player that the end of the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state, is approaching. In addition, by changing the selection ratio of BGM types depending on the number of remaining time reductions, for example, if a fast-tempo BGM is selected with a large number of remaining time reductions remaining, this special symbol lottery will be a jackpot. This can give players a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since common processing can be executed for the BGM tempo selected according to the number of remaining time reductions and the BGM tempo selected according to the special symbol lottery result, the processing of the audio lamp control device 113 The load can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the type of BGM and the playback speed (tempo) are selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the remaining period of the time saving state, but other configurations may also be used. For example, the table for selecting the type of BGM and the table for selecting the tempo of BGM may be different, and one element may be selected from each table according to different conditions. With this, the BGM to be played is determined by combining the elements selected from each table, so it is possible to diversify the BGM. In this case, it is preferable to configure the type of BGM to be selectable using an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and to variably select the tempo of the BGM depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

In addition, in this control example, the tempo of the BGM is more likely to become faster when winning a jackpot, but it is sufficient if the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol according to the tempo of the BGM; , BGM with a slow tempo may be configured to be easily played. Further, in this control example, a specific tempo is selected as the tempo of the BGM to be played, but the tempo may be changed while the BGM is being played. In this case, for example, the BGM will be played at a common tempo until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the BGM was played, and after that, the BGM will be played according to the selected BGM playback speed. It is best to configure it so that With this configuration, it is possible to make the lottery result unpredictable by voice immediately after the special symbol variation starts, thereby making the player interested in the various performances during the special symbol variation. I can do it.

Furthermore, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display information indicating the type of BGM currently being executed and the playback speed (tempo). This allows the player to view information regarding the audio currently being played, making it possible to provide a game that is easier to understand.

The stop sound selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting the type of sound (stop sound) to be played in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the type of stop sound is configured to vary depending on the type and playback speed of BGM played during special symbol variation, or the variation pattern that is set. As a result, it is possible to reproduce a stop sound that corresponds to both the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM output from the audio output device 226, and the display effect. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity between this and the audio production.

Here, the contents of the stop sound selection table 222ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 174(b), in this control example, different stop sounds are generated depending on the BGM type selected using the BGM type selection table 222aa and the variation pattern (symbol stop timing) set this time. It is configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the BGM type is "BGMA (BPM120)", the symbol stops at either timing A (see FIG. 169(a)) or timing B (see FIG. 170(a)). If note A (beamed eighth note) is selected (see Figure 169(b)) and is "BGMA (BPM80)", the symbol stop timing is timing A (see Figure 169(a)) and timing B. (See FIG. 170(a)), if stop sound B (triplet) is selected (see FIG. 169(c)) and "BGMB (BPM120)", the symbol stop timing is timing A. (see FIG. 169(a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170(a)), stop sound B (triplet) is selected.

Returning to FIG. 173(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 173(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example. The RAM 223 of the second control example has a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a returning flag 223l, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stopped symbol storage area 223n, and an outer reel. The difference is that the operation counter 223p and inner reel operation counter 223q are deleted, and a switching flag 223aa and a voice production counter 223ab are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The switching flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that a switching condition for switching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, in this control example, when the gaming state is on standby, by operating the frame button 22, the scroll mode of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled. It is configured so that it can be switched, and when the switching condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 during standby (when the frame button operation for changing the scroll mode is executed), the switch is turned on. When a special symbol variation variation pattern command is received with the switching flag 223aa set to ON, that is, when executing a new special symbol variation, a switching command for switching the scroll mode. is set.

In this way, in this control example, when an operation for changing the scrolling mode is performed during standby in the gaming state, a variable display in which the scrolling mode is varied is executed from the special symbol variation that is executed afterwards. It consists of Note that in this control example, the scroll mode is configured to change even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific variable display (when the player operates the frame button 22). Since the scroll mode is changed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, the switching flag 223aa is never turned on.

Note that a timer is provided to measure the elapsed time after the switching flag 223aa is set to the on state, and when the timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the switching flag 223aa is set to the ON state. It may be configured to turn off. As a result, even if the previous player performs an operation to turn on the switching flag 223aa and stops the game, the next player will be able to play the game in the variable scroll mode. It is possible to prevent a situation where the player ends up playing a game. Further, information for indicating the currently set scroll mode may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during standby.

The audio production counter 223ab is a counter used when selecting the BGM type in the audio lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 99 in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141). (not shown).

Next, the contents defined in the ROM 302 and RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 will be explained with reference to FIG. 175. 175(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226, and FIG. 175(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. It is.

Note that the contents of the audio file storage area 302a defined in the ROM 302, the music data group storage area 303a, the music pointer 303b, the maximum value storage area 303c, and the music timer 303d defined in the RAM 303 are as follows. Since this has been described above with reference to FIG. 158, the description will be omitted.

The confirmation flag 303e is a flag for indicating that a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed has been received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed for display. is set to ON when a message is received (see S9217 in FIG. 196). Then, in the audio setting process (see S9002 in FIG. 198), it is referenced at the end timing of the song data being played (S9403 in FIG. 198), and if it is set to on (S9403 in FIG. 198: Yes). , is determined to be normal and is set to off (S9404 in FIG. 198). On the other hand, if it is set to off in the process of S9403, the process of configuring the music pointer value to 00H is executed again (see S9405 in FIG. 198).

In other words, in this control example, music data is set in advance according to the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol is confirmed and displayed at the end timing of the music data playback, that is, at the end timing of the fluctuation time. If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received, that is, the special symbol variation has not ended even though the predetermined variation time has elapsed. If it is determined, the music is configured to play in a loop. As a result, even if the special symbols do not stop changing due to a malfunction, it is possible to prevent the playback of the music from ending first, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, control of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179. Note that the points that have been changed from the first control example will be explained, and the illustration and explanation of the same control will be omitted.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2263), the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 145: S2603) is changed to the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653) in contrast to the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 145: S2213) in the first control example. The difference is that audio setting processing (S2651) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 177, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (S2263) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653).

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), the detailed content of the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and if the switching flag 223aa is set to on, (from vertical scroll to horizontal Timing of switching from scrolling or horizontal scrolling to vertical scrolling) A process is executed to output the commands necessary for the switching setting.

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), first, the value of the production counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and the value of the production counter 223j obtained and the type of the extracted variation pattern (variation type in response to the variation pattern command) are selected. ), a fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202aa (S2751). Thereafter, it is determined whether the switching flag 223aa is on, and if the switching flag 223aa is on (S2752: Yes), a display switching command and an audio switching command are set (S2753). Here, if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling are respectively set. On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command are respectively set to instruct a change to vertical scrolling. Note that in the process of S2752, if it is determined that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2752: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the audio setting process (S2651), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (S2263), will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of this audio setting process (S2651). In this audio setting process (S2651), the type of BGM to be output during the variation of the special symbol is determined, and the stop sound type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined BGM type.

In the audio setting process (FIG. 178: S2651), the value of the audio effect counter 223ab is acquired (S3701). The BGM type is determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa (see FIG. 174(a)) based on the value of the acquired audio production counter 223ab and the validity determination result (the validity determination result of the special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command). S3702). An audio BGM command corresponding to the selected BGM type is set (S3703). The stop timing of each symbol row is extracted (analyzed) from the current variation pattern (S3704). Based on the determined BGM stop type and each symbol row stop timing, a stop sound type is determined from the stop sound selection table 222ab (see FIG. 174(b)) (S3705). An audio stop sound type command corresponding to the determined stop sound type is set (S3706). Audio commands necessary for other effects, etc. are set (S3707), and this process ends.

In this way, since the BGM type is determined based on the result of the judgment, it is possible to predict the result of the judgment at an early stage based on the BGM that is output, thereby creating an expectation that the player will win.

In addition, in this control example, the BGM type of the special symbol that changes based on the result of the judgment by lottery is determined. It may be configured such that a background is set in advance, a background is determined by a lottery, and BGM corresponding to the background is selected. In such a configuration, for example, you can set a morning background and a night background, output BGM with a fast tempo for the morning background, and output BGM with a slow tempo for the night background. By configuring this, even if the BGM is the same, it is possible to output BGM that gives an impression that matches the background.

Note that in this control example, the same BGM is configured to be set at different tempos, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that different BGMs are output at different tempos, and a stop sound that matches the tempo is set. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is configured so that multiple BGMs are set and output while the symbol is changing, and the stop sound is selected and output in accordance with the tempo of the BGM being output at the timing when the symbol stops. may be configured.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S2257) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S2257). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2257), the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the frame button 22 is operated (standby (standby), execution of a specific effect (reach display mode of W reach) (middle)) executes the process of switching and setting the settings for switching between vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling.

In the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (FIG. 179: S2257), first, it is determined whether an operation on the frame button 22 has been detected (whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed)) (S3801). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3801: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is on standby (standby) (S3802). If it is determined that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is on standby (S3802: Yes), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S3803), and this process ends.

Here, when the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, when a new special symbol variation is started from the standby state, the vertical scroll and horizontal scroll settings are switched and changed. Thereby, when a player plays a game, he or she can play the game in a scrolling direction that matches the player's preference.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that it is not on standby (S3802: No), it is determined whether a specific effect is being executed (S3804). Here, the specific performance indicates a performance period in which special symbols are displayed in a W reach display mode in a variable pattern that becomes W reach. Note that the specific performance is not limited to W reach, and may be other performances.

In the process of S3804, if it is determined that a specific effect is being executed (S3804: Yes), if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command is issued to instruct to change to horizontal scrolling. , audio switching commands are set (S3805). On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command are respectively set to instruct a change to vertical scrolling. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S3804: No), other frame button processing is executed (S3705), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S3801: No), this process ends.

<About the control process of the display control device 1140 in the second control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 180, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 1140 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, so when the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately reads the first memory of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 1140 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, rather than being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 234 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 1140 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the boot program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently in use are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 181, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further points the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing in S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the steps S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 192(b)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the simple command Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 1140 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 1140 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first prize opening 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the image on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display image setting process (S6351) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187.

In the display image setting process (S6351), when a switching command is received in the command determination process (S6302), a process for transmitting the image information of the variable display layer 1 is executed. Details of the display image setting process (S6351) will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

After executing the display image setting process (S6351), the display setting process (S6303) is then executed. In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer the image to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the changed back image is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 166, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 1140 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command judgment process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (Jackpot A to F, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, non-front/back off reach, complete miss). The stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S6451). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S6451: Yes), the invalid flag 233k is set to ON (S6452), and the process returns to S6401.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (S6451: No), it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to F, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, completely off) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type table in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b). FIG. 185(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(a). FIG. 187(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7002. .

In addition, in the task processing (S6304), if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image discrimination flag set in S7102 is , the type of back image to be displayed at that point in time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified as time passes, and the RAM in which image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. Specify the type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process S7202, and the error type is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process S7202. Processing is executed to display a warning image corresponding to the type on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 184(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, details of the above-mentioned display image setting process (S6351), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing this display image setting process (S6351).

In the display image setting process (S6351), first, it is determined whether an invalid flag (not shown) is set to on (S7151). This invalid flag is set to ON in the process of S6452 when it is determined in the command determination process (S6302) that a display switching command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113. In the process of S7151, if it is determined that the invalid flag is set to on (S7151: Yes), the image information of the horizontal scroll display data among the variable display data set in the display data table buffer is rewritten to transparent information (S7152), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the invalidation flag is off (S7151: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is Time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404). Next, the process moves to S7405.

In the process of S7405, the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), this process is ended, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S7501: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while transferring the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, as well as image data of the main controller 110, audio lamp controller 113, and display controller 1140. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a), S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189). The information written in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S7712), and proceeds to the process of S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 1140 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the stop type information provided is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, the image data is transferred to the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 166) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the second period is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control process of the audio output device 226 in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. In this second control example, the audio command set by the audio lamp control device 113 is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), and is configured to output audio data corresponding to the received audio command.

In this way, the voice lamp control device 113, which can receive commands for indicating the results of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, outputs various display commands to the display control device 1140 and the voice By setting various audio commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of presentation modes (effect display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) for indicating the lottery results of special symbols can be set. (visual display mode) and effect sound mode (auditory sound mode) output from the speaker via the audio output device 226) can be set centrally. Therefore, when a plurality of performance modes are executed to show the lottery results of special symbols, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the execution timing of each performance mode, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory sound mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the special symbol lottery results, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the player It is sufficient if it executes an effect to show the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, using a tactile pressing mode to apply a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, the hand operating the operating handle) or an olfactory presentation mode to stimulate the player's sense of smell. The lottery result of the special symbol may be suggested or notified to the player. In this way, by configuring to perform one performance by appropriately combining a plurality of types of performance modes, it is possible to set various performance modes to be executed to show the lottery results of special symbols.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed in which processing is performed according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9001). The details of this command determination process (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but when various audio commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 are received, the Processing for outputting the selected audio is executed. After the processing in S9001, audio setting processing is executed to play audio data and update the value of the music pointer (S9002). Details of this audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 198.

When the process of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off process is executed (S9006). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(b). FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interruption process (see FIG. 195(b)) is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001). In this command determination process (S9001), control is executed according to the type of various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In command determination processing (S9001), it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command The determination process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S9202), and then the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are For all commands, the types of the commands are analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether there is a voice stop sound command that outputs a voice (stop on) at the timing of stopping each third symbol (S9204), and then If it is determined that there is a sound command (S9204: Yes), the sound file (stop sound data group) corresponding to the stop sound notified by the command is read out from the sound file storage area 302a of the ROM 302. The audio file (stop sound data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is played is set in the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the stop sound data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206).

When the process of S9206 is completed, next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and voice synthesis is performed. The reproduction of the stop sound data is set to CN (channel) 2 of the unit 306 (S9208), and the process moves to S9209.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the audio stop sound command is not included in the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9204: No), or if the process of S9208 described above is executed. If so, then it is determined whether or not there is an audio BGM command among the commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209). In the process of S9209, if it is determined that there is an audio BGM command (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received audio BGM command is read from the audio file storage area 302a. Then, the read audio file (music data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the process of S9210 is completed, the playback speed corresponding to the BGM tempo indicated by the received audio BGM command is then set (S9211). Next, "00H" is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the BGM data is set to the music timer 303d (S9212). Next, BGM correction processing (S9213) is executed.

Here, in this control example, even when the same BGM is played back, the tempo of the played BGM can be made different. Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a stores music with a standard tempo (for example, 80 BPM (beats per minute), that is, a tempo in which a quarter note beats 80 times per minute). The audio data indicating a standard tempo song read from the audio file storage area 302a is stored at the tempo corresponding to the information indicating the tempo (tempo information) included in the BGM command for the song received this time. The system is configured to vary the playback speed of audio data so that

In this way, by configuring the audio file stored in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a) to be able to set different tempos by varying the playback speed, it is possible to set different tempos for the same song. It is possible to eliminate the need to store the file in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a).

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, the BGM correction process (S9213), which is one process in the command determination process (S9001) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. In the BGM correction process (S9213), when the output periods of BGM and stop sound overlap, a process of creating a corrected audio file is executed. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the contents of the BGM correction process (S9213).

In the BGM correction process (S9213), first, the audio file of stop sound data stored in the music data group storage area 303a is read out (S9301). The stop sound data read in the process of S9301 is stored in the process of S9205 of the command determination process (S9001 in FIG. 196). Next, the audio output period (the period during which the stop sound is played) is extracted from the read audio file (S9302), and the audio output period of the extracted stop sound data and the audio output period of the BGM data are compared (S9303). . Next, in the process of S9303, as a result of comparing the stop sound data and BGM data, it is determined whether there is an overlapping period in which the audio output periods overlap (S9304). If it is determined that there is an overlapping period between the stop sound and BGM (S9304: Yes), a corrected audio file is created in which the BGM data corresponding to the overlapping period is corrected to mute (S9305), and the music data group storage area is The BGM audio file stored in 303a is rewritten with the corrected audio file created in the process of S9305 (S9306), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that there is no overlap between the audio output periods of the stop sound data and the BGM data (S9304: No), there is no need to create a corrected audio file, so this process ends. .

As explained above, in this control example, BGM (music, tempo) corresponding to the special symbol variation is set in the audio lamp control device 113, and a stop sound corresponding to the set BGM mode is set. It is composed of Thereby, even if the tempo of the BGM is changed, it is possible to reproduce a stop sound that corresponds to the tempo. In addition, if the timing of stepping on the beat of the set BGM (beating timing) and the stop timing of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol fluctuation do not match, the playback period will be changed as the type of stop sound. is configured to set a long stop sound, and set a stop sound that beats at both the timing of the beat of the set BGM and the stop timing of the third symbol. With this configuration, even if the tempo of the BGM is different, it is possible to play a stop sound that corresponds to both the set tempo of the BGM and the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set a performance mode that combines sound and display without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, the audio output device 226 outputs a stop sound audio file that is played in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol, and a BGM audio file that is played in response to special symbol fluctuations. They are configured to be able to be set separately, and when playing the respectively set audio files, the BGM audio is set to mute for locations where the audio playback timings overlap.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation where the BGM audio and the stop sound audio are output at the same time and the volume becomes partially high. Furthermore, even if the timing of the beat of the BGM and the timing of the beat of the stop sound are slightly different (for example, by 0.05 seconds), the sound can be played back without giving the player a sense of discomfort. .

Returning to FIG. 196, the explanation will be continued. After executing the BGM correction process (S9213), the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9214), The reproduction of BGM data is set to CN1 of the speech synthesis unit 306 (S9215), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if it is determined that the audio BGM command has not been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), it is determined whether there is a confirmed audio command (S9216). If it is determined that there is a voice confirmation command (S9216: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set on (S9217), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the process of S9216, if it is determined that there is no confirmed command for audio (S9216: No), it is determined whether there is a switching command for audio (S9218). If it is determined that there is an audio switching command (S9218: Yes), the audio file data is set to be switched (S9219), and the process returns to S9201. On the other hand, in the process of S9218, if it is determined that the audio switching command has not been received (S9218: No), processing according to other commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214). , the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command instructing the reproduction of a sound effect, reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. Further, if the command instructs the reproduction of a warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing this audio setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 198), it is first determined whether or not BGM is being played (S9401), and if it is determined that BGM is not being played (S9401: No), a single sound effect This means that either a warning sound or the like is being played, or that no sound is being output, and there is no possibility of switching to other audio data while the sound is being played back, so the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S9401, if it is determined that BGM is being reproduced (S9401: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9402). That is, it is determined whether the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the reproduction of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9402: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if it is determined that the end timing of the music data being played has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9402: Yes), the music data In the data group storage area 303a, processing is executed to set the reproduction of the music data next to the music data whose reproduction has ended this time. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the confirmation flag 303e is set to on (S9403). If it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is on (S9403: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to OFF (S9404), and the process moves to S9406. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is not on (S9403: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to 00H (S9405).

In other words, normally, the value of the music timer 303d corresponding to the BGM is set in accordance with the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and the BGM is also configured to stop at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. However, if the voice lamp control device 113 is unable to receive the stop command output from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, the confirmation flag 303e is set to on. The configuration is such that the BGM is played from the beginning without having to do so. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the problem in which only the BGM stops first when the fluctuation of the special symbol has not stopped (when a command to indicate that the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped cannot be received). I can do it.

Next, in the process of S9406, it is determined whether the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9406 ).

In the process of S9406, if it is determined that the value of the song pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current song data group (S9406: No), 1 is added to the value of the song pointer 303b. and updates (S9407), and the process moves to S9409. On the other hand, in the process of S9406, if it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to " 01H" (S9408), and the process moves to S9409. Through the process of S9408, by updating the value of the music pointer 303b, the music can be played in a predetermined order.

<About another example of the second control example>
Next, another example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 199. This other example is different from the second control example described above in that the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the variable display device unit 80 used in the first control example described above. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this other example is a combination of the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example described above, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this other example, with respect to the operation control of the inner reel 811 explained in the above-mentioned first control example, the rotation speed of the inner reel is configured to be varied according to the tempo of the BGM that is set. . In this way, by varying the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 according to the tempo of the BGM being played, it is possible to perform a realistic performance based on the sound and the rotational status of the inner reel 811. Specifically, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is configured to become faster as the tempo of the BGM becomes faster.

Here, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the audio setting process 3 (S2671) executed in this other example will be explained. This audio setting process 3 (S2671) is a BGM determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa for the audio setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 178) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example described above. The tempo (BPM) of the type is determined (S3751), and if it is determined that the determined BGM tempo (BPM) is 120 (S3751: Yes), high speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3753) and determined. The difference is that if it is determined that the tempo (BPM) of the BGM is not 120 (that is, it is 80) (S3751: No), a low speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3752). Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanations are omitted.

With this configuration, drive control is performed so that the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 corresponds to the BGM determined using the BGM type selection table 222aa in order to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol to the player. Since it is possible to do this, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this other example described above, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is configured to be varied according to the set BGM, but the operation contents other than the inner reel 811 are configured to be varied according to the set BGM. It may be configured as follows.

The operation at the start of rotation of the inner reel 811 is made so that the timing at which the player grasps the tempo of the BGM to be executed this time is the same as the timing at which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 to be executed this time. It is best to configure it to perform control. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 and knowing the current lottery result before the BGM is played.

Further, in this example, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is varied in accordance with the tempo of the BGM that is set, but even if other operation control is performed on the inner reel 811, For example, the inner reel 811 may be configured to temporarily stop rotating, temporarily increase or decrease the rotation speed, or temporarily vary the rotation direction depending on the type or tempo of the BGM. It's okay. With this configuration, by using not only the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 but also the rotation mode, it is possible to create a performance that has a sense of unity with the set BGM.

Furthermore, in this other example, a configuration is used in which the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 of the variable display unit 80 used in the first control example described above is varied according to the tempo of the BGM that is set. In addition, for example, the variable display speed of the 7-segment display section 1600 or the variable display speed of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be varied.

In addition, in this different example, the variation speed (rotation speed of the inner reel 811) of the third symbol (a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol) is varied in accordance with the tempo of the BGM that is set. However, there is a problem in that by varying the variation speed of the third symbol, it becomes difficult to stop the predetermined third symbol.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it is preferable to configure, for example, to set the stop display mode of the third symbol based on information that varies the variation speed of the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to display a stopped symbol that corresponds to the set variation speed of the third symbol, so it is possible to perform a variable display that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, as another countermeasure, if multiple third symbols are stopped and the lottery result of a special symbol is displayed by a combination of the plurality of stopped and displayed third symbols, the timing at which each third symbol is stopped may be changed. It may be configured to be determined in accordance with the set variation speed of the third symbol. Furthermore, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is set to a low speed, and the third symbol is stopped in a predetermined stop display mode by continuing the fluctuation of the third symbol for a predetermined period at a low fluctuation speed. It may be configured as follows.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600) capable of variably displaying identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are provided, The display areas (areas visible to the player) of the plurality of display means are arranged so as to overlap, and by switching the operation mode of each display means, various variable display modes can be set. . With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various variable display modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the first control example, a display means using a medium on which the third symbol is preprinted (inner reel 811, outer reel 821) and a display means using seven segments (7 segment display section 1600) are used. However, any other display means may be used as long as it is capable of displaying the third symbol to the player; for example, it may be configured with the liquid crystal display used in the second control example described above. The third symbol display device 81 may be used as one of the display means, or a transparent acrylic plate engraved to indicate a specific display mode may be irradiated with light from the side to display a specific display mode. A display means using a light guide plate that allows the player to visually confirm the mode or a display means using organic EL may be used as one of the display means. Furthermore, as in the second control example described above, a plurality of image layers may be created for one liquid crystal display, and the image layer to be actually displayed may be switched.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, since the display means for executing the variable display of the third symbol is configured to be switched depending on the gaming state to be set, it is possible to grasp the variable display mode being executed. This allows the player to easily understand the currently set gaming state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display mode may be set so as to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state.

In the first control example described above, a double reel structure in which reel-type display means are arranged overlappingly is used, and the reel (outer reel 821) on the outer side (the side closer to the player's viewpoint) of the double reel structure is , an area (first area) where the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure is visible to the player and an area (second area, third area) where it is difficult to see are formed, and the inner When performing a variable display of the third symbol using the reel 811, the outer reel 821 is variably moved to the first area, and when performing a variable display of the third symbol using the outer reel 821, It is configured to be executed using the second area and third area of the outer reel 821.

Thereby, a plurality of variable display modes can be easily set using the double reel structure. Furthermore, in this control example, since the variable display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set using both reels of the double reel structure, more variable display modes can be set, resulting in a dramatic effect. can be increased.

In this control example, in addition to the reel display using the above-mentioned double reel structure, the lottery result of the special symbol is also notified to the player by a 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery results of the special symbols in more various display modes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is different from conventional gaming machines that display the lottery results of special symbols using a liquid crystal screen, and the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery results of special symbols by the manner in which the reels are stopped. It is composed of In such gaming machines, like conventional gaming machines, the LCD screen is used to display information other than the lottery results of special symbols, such as continuous effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) that increase the expectation of winning a jackpot as the number of consecutive symbols increases. Since there is no display area for informing the player of information indicating the number of times the continuous performance has been performed, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous performance. On the other hand, in this control example, by operating the displacement member 670 to vary the display area visible to the player, the process for the continuous performance (the number of times the continuous performance is executed) is notified to the player. It consists of Thereby, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not have a liquid crystal display device, it is possible for the player to easily understand the process of continuous performance.

Although this control example uses a configuration that notifies the player of the process of continuous performance by varying the display area of the reel display, other configurations may be used to notify the player of the process of continuous performance. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) will be changed depending on the number of times the continuous performance is performed, and the sound effect during reel operation will be changed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-described continuous performance is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is configured to gradually become narrower depending on the number of times the continuous performance is executed. With this configuration, the narrower the display area of the reel display, the higher the player's expectation of a jackpot, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. .

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 and narrowing the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of valid lines that display combinations of symbols to indicate the lottery results of special symbols) ), it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this first control example, the time (variable time) from when a special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is configured to vary depending on the gaming state that is set. Specifically, in gaming states where special symbol drawings are likely to be executed (time saving state, probability variable state), a short variable time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of special symbol drawings executed per unit time, and special In a gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to draw a symbol, the configuration is such that a long variable time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which a special symbol is not drawn (period in which the special symbol does not change). are doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is varied is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set (for example, 0.2 seconds). and execute a 7-segment display in which the speed at which the symbols displayed in the display area are varied is fast (for example, 0.05 seconds) in gaming states where short variation times are likely to be set (probability variation state, time saving state). It consists of As a result, even if multiple display methods with different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol will be reliably stopped and displayed after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. can be done.

In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the fluctuating display period) in which the display symbol for showing the result of one lottery of special symbols is dynamically displayed, it appears as if multiple lottery results are being displayed. It is configured to perform a pseudo-fluctuation effect that looks like this.

This pseudo-fluctuation performance is configured such that during one dynamic display period, a re-fluctuation performance is executed multiple times in which the displayed symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) and then fluctuated again. It is configured such that the more the number of times this re-fluctuation performance is executed, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using a liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation performances (the number of pseudo-sequences) executed during the pseudo-variation performance on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects performed during the pseudo-variation effect to the player. There was a problem in that it was difficult to notify the number of pseudo consecutive runs in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is varied every time the re-variation performance is executed, thereby informing the player of the number of times the re-variation performance has been executed. This makes it possible to provide games that are easy for players to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be varied so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 becomes narrower each time the re-variation performance is executed, and each time the re-variation performance is executed. , the number of effective lines within the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the effective lines that the player is forced to look at, so it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the process in which the combination of display symbols that corresponds to a jackpot is stopped and displayed. .

In addition, in this control example, the period in which one special symbol variation is executed is used to execute the above-mentioned pseudo-variation performance, that is, a production in which the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is varied. However, as an alternative configuration, it may be configured to execute an effect that varies the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main controller 110, which will be described later with reference to FIG. It is preferable to determine the lottery results in advance and set a performance (continuous performance) to span a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the preliminary determination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the special symbol lottery results multiple times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so it is possible for the player to know when the special symbol will be executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether a continuous performance has been executed in response to the fluctuating display of.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration is used in which a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but by varying the effective line of the third symbol, the player For example, it may be configured to provide a new fluctuating display effect for the third symbol, and for example, a pseudo fluctuating effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the set fluctuation time), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during a pseudo fluctuation effect is a predetermined number of times and the ready-to-reach display is displayed, the possibility of winning the jackpot will be increased. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while always having a feeling of expectation regarding a jackpot during the period from the execution of the pseudo-variation performance until the end of the pseudo-variation performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED 671) provided in the variable display unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable decorative accessory is located at a specific position, a new effective line can be formed. It may be configured. In addition, a new effective line may be formed when the displayed symbol is first stopped and displayed and then the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED 671) emits light. In this way, by forming a new active line by combining display symbols that can be displayed in a variable manner and elements other than the display symbols to satisfy a predetermined condition, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol. When playing the game, players have to pay close attention not only to the fluctuating display mode of the displayed symbols, but also to the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessories, which prevents players from getting bored with the game early. can do.

In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions becomes less than five, the player is notified of the number of remaining time reductions using 7 segments. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the period until the end of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state), so that the player may feel uncomfortable if the time-saving state ends suddenly. You can restrain yourself from giving away.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, first, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the remaining time shortened number is displayed. It is configured so that Then, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7-segment that displays the remaining time reduction number. It consists of

With this configuration, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the number of remaining time reductions can be displayed differently. It is possible to reliably notify the number of times.

Furthermore, in this control example, after the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, there is no need to display the remaining time shortening number display indicating the remaining time shortening number, that is, if the special symbol wins the jackpot. In this case, the display pattern is configured to be set regardless of the number of remaining time shortening times that will be displayed next, so there is no limit to how the display pattern can be set to indicate that you have won the jackpot. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the displayed symbols that are stopped and displayed according to the privilege given by the won jackpot (the size of the number of prize balls and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game).

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the remaining time reduction count is displayed using the middle 7-segment display section 1600b, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of remaining time reductions may be displayed using the segment display section 1600a or the right 7-segment display section 1600c. In this case, for example, if the left 7-segment display section 1600a that is first stopped and displayed is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game can be played while knowing in advance the number of remaining time reductions that will be displayed next. By doing so, when the same number as the number of remaining time shortening times that will be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol to show the special symbol lottery result on the left 7-segment display section 1600a, the current lottery result is a jackpot. This can be made known in advance. Furthermore, the 7-segment display section 1600 on which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time are displayed within one variable display period (including the symbol confirmation time). The display is configured to display the short remaining time for a fixed period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, for example, if the set special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds, the special symbol will be displayed for 1.5 seconds, and then for 0.5 seconds, regardless of whether or not the remaining time shortening display is executed. However, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not to display the short remaining time, and if the short remaining time is not displayed, the short remaining time is displayed. In contrast to executing a special symbol variation, if you are in a state where a short remaining time display is to be performed, a 0.5 second shortening variation is executed as a special symbol variation, and then a 0.5 second short remaining time display is performed. is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to perform both the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time within one special symbol variable display period.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the display of the short remaining time are both executed within one special symbol variable display period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple It may be configured to display the number of remaining time reductions so as to straddle the special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, a special symbol fluctuation display is executed for a certain period of time regardless of the set fluctuation time, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time is shortened. It is best to set this as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbols can be made constant, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified, so the type of variable display data can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for displaying the short remaining time count is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the special symbol fluctuating display is executed and the set fluctuating time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0 .5 seconds), it is preferable to configure the remaining time shortening number display to be executed over the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to reliably grasp the number of remaining time reductions. However, in this case, since the special symbol fluctuations will start while the remaining time shortening number display is being executed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that a new special symbol fluctuation has started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area that is not used for displaying the number of shortened remaining times (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by changing the light emitting color of the display mode of the short remaining time count display (the display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111(b)), it is possible to notify the player that a special symbol change has started. It is best to configure it as follows. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a new special symbol variation has started in an easy-to-understand manner while displaying the number of shortened remaining times.

When executing the above-described process, specifically, the following configuration may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113. First, a variation time extraction means extracts a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a variation of the third symbol within the variation time of the special symbol variation. A setting means for setting a third symbol variation display time for displaying a display and a remaining time shortening display time for displaying a remaining time shortening number; a third symbol variation display time set by the setting means; and a variation time extracting means for extracting the third symbol variation display time. a calculation means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times); a lower limit determination means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculation means is less than or equal to a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second); If it is determined that the time is below the lower limit fluctuation time, a continuation flag is set on to indicate that the display of the number of short remaining time periods will not end within the current fluctuation pattern period.

This continuation flag is configured to be set off at the timing when the display of the short remaining time count ends, and when the continuation flag is set to on, that is, when the short remaining time count display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new symbol variation will be executed while the remaining time shortening number of times is being displayed.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for displaying the short remaining time, and even if the shortest time is set among the plurality of different times, the display of the short remaining time will not be displayed during the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the process will not end within the specified time. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the third symbol fluctuation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when displaying the remaining time shortening number of times and when not displaying the remaining time shortening. When displaying the number of times, the third symbol variation display time may be configured to be more likely to be set to be shorter than when displaying the number of times.

In addition, in this control example, the special symbol fluctuation time includes a period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (design fluctuation period) and a period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure may be such that the symbol variation period and the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol are controlled separately. In this case, for example, if the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol confirmation period, and the third symbol fluctuation display time is set longer than the symbol fluctuation period, or the remaining time short number display period is set in advance so that it is longer than the symbol confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time shortening number display cannot be executed during the symbol fluctuation period, this is to indicate that it will not end within the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to on.

In this control example, when performing a variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 (a variable display using 7 segments), the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be varied while changing a display mode different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a display mode in which only one segment out of seven segments is lit). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display section 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, if a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light, the game This makes it possible to prevent situations in which people may be misled.

In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600, there is a high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed, and a high-speed variable display period that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and a display mode different from the third symbol is variably displayed during the high-speed fluctuation display period, and a symbol display mode showing the third symbol is variably displayed during the low-speed fluctuation display period. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation, and also to prevent the third symbol from suddenly stopping. .

In the second control example described above, the tempo (BPM (beats per minute)) of the fluctuating sound (BGM) output during the fluctuating display of the special symbol (during the fluctuating display of the third symbol) is configured to be variable. In addition, the stop sound of the third symbol is configured to be varied in accordance with the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) being played.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol in accordance with the BGM played at different tempos, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, which increases the production effect. can be increased.

In the second control example described above, by varying the output tempo even if the BGM is the same, it is possible to make the player feel as if a variety of BGMs are being output, which causes the problem that the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. Furthermore, by varying the tempo of the BGM, even when the same variation pattern is displayed (dynamic display), different variation patterns are executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output accordingly. It is possible to make the user think of a variety of variations in the special design.

Further, even when the tempo of BGM is changed and output, a stop sound that matches the tempo change is selected and output, so it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. In addition, even when the tempo of BGM is played back by changing it flexibly through a lottery, etc., the stop sound can be set to match the standard tempo by converting and outputting the stop sound according to the change in tempo. By doing so, it is possible to easily configure the system to output a matching stop sound.

In addition, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable, the BGM with the tempo that is likely to be selected in the case of a win is output, allowing the player to judge whether it is a win or not. It is possible to give an early expectation that the result will be a hit.

In addition, in the second control example described above, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory sound mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the special symbol lottery results, but the present invention is not limited to these. , it is sufficient if it executes an effect to show the lottery result of the special symbol to the player. For example, using a tactile pressing mode to apply a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, the hand operating the operating handle) or an olfactory presentation mode to stimulate the player's sense of smell. The lottery result of the special symbol may be suggested or notified to the player. In this way, by configuring to perform one performance by appropriately combining a plurality of types of performance modes, it is possible to set various performance modes to be executed to show the lottery results of special symbols.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, we also offer arepachi, mahjong balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine that is a combination of a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The display of identification information starts to fluctuate due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button), or
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the fluctuating display of the identification information stops and the display is fixed, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. A slot machine that generates special games, and in this case, typical examples of game media include coins, medals, etc.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the control lever,
For example, the fluctuation of symbols is stopped due to the operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated in which the player is given a large amount of balls into a saucer at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is movable, the guide member is , a pair of protrusions are provided that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface, and the pair of protrusions allow the game balls to move along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the gaming machines A1 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. In this case, JP-A-20
Japanese Patent No. 03-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions,
Even if the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolling) on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, the game balls are guided (rolling) in different directions (one is on the glass plate side and the other is on the glass plate side). It can be biased toward the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. In addition, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass from the other side of the guide member, and in this case, the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, so the player There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the guide member includes a pair of protrusions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. Since the projecting parts are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surface can come into contact with the projecting part. By doing so, it is possible to reliably bias the game ball. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball that enters from one side of the guide member is provided with a protrusion. It can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball entry hole and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members are arranged so that the tip side thereof is close to or separated from each other. By being rotated in the direction of rotation, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of protrusions protrude from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. a direction in which the protrusion on one of the pair of wing members and the protrusion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 is arranged at different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and has a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion projects from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion on the other wing member extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided, by bringing the game balls guided (rolling) along the guide surface into contact with the protrusion, it is possible to securely hold the game balls. can be biased toward the result,
The ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the protruding portion on one wing member and the protruding portion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the wing member). By arranging the game ball at different positions in the direction of It can be brought into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end side of the wing member than to the distal end side.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip side of the wing member, so that the wing member is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the proximal end than the distal end of the wing member, the path of the game ball that comes into contact with the protruding part and is biased is directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from returning to the course before deflection until it reaches this side (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance while remaining in the biased state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member, and the game ball that is guided through the first region does not come into contact with it. The protruding portion is formed to have a size, and the first region of the guide surface on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are equal to the size of the guide surface. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided through the first region has a non-continuous region. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that causes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first area, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball, The ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In this case, the first region of the guide surface on one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. Since they are arranged at different positions in the directions of However, the game balls can be biased in different directions, allowing the balls to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member includes a regulating portion that comes into contact with the wing member to restrict rotation of the wing member, A game machine A5 characterized in that a protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member restricts the rotation of the wing member by coming into contact with the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the protruding portion is a portion that protrudes from the wing member (guide surface), the relatively rigid portion of the wing member can be used as a stopper for bringing it into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. Accordingly, damage to the wing member can be suppressed.

In gaming machine A5, the protruding portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with a side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is substantially flush with the proximal side surface of the wing member. A game machine A6 characterized in that a side surface of the protruding portion that is formed abuts at least a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the protruding portion is formed to be substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is formed on the proximal end side of the wing member. Since the side surface of the protruding part formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member contacts at least the regulating part of the base member, the part that is far from the rotation axis (the side surface of the protruding part) is connected to the regulating part of the base member. Minutes that can be brought into contact with
The reaction force input from the regulating part to the wing member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Furthermore, for example, compared to the case where the protruding end surface of the protruding part is brought into contact with the regulating part of the base member, the regulating part of the base member can be separated from the ball entry opening, and the flow to the ball entry opening is reduced. You can secure a space for roads. In addition to the side surface of the protruding portion, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member may also be brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members has no protrusions when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the opposing distance between the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surfaces face each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the protrusions is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at a position where the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the protruding part is provided protruding from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further spaced apart by the height of the protruding part to prevent the game ball from being caught between the protruding parts. This increases the space required for arranging the pair of wing members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the opposing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where no protruding part is formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing interval of the protruding part is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, The space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In other words, even if the pair of wing members start to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolling) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will not be present between the opposing protrusions. By locating the protrusion, the game ball can be ejected from between the opposing protrusions and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the protrusions.
The game ball discharged from between the opposing protrusions by the intervening wall is located between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the protrusions are not formed, and the opposing interval at such a position is Since the diameter of the ball is larger than that of the ball, the game ball will not be caught. As a result, the distance between the protrusions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product that does not have a protruding portion protruding from the guide surface.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entry hole in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity, and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall, the ball can enter the ball entrance.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is placed at a position forming the closed state, and the timing at which the other wing member is placed at a position forming the closed state. A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the timing at which the game is played is different.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is placed in a position where the other wing member forms a closed state and the timing at which the other wing member is adjusted are determined. Since the timing at which the ball is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed is different, the game ball is difficult to be caught between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the opposing interval between the pair of wing members can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In the game machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole and prevents the game ball from entering the ball entry hole, and a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position that protrudes toward the front side of the ball entry hole and allows a game ball rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entry hole, and the guide surface of the guide member includes: The ball is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. The gaming machine A10 is also arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a closed position in which it retracts below the ball entry hole and makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the ball entry port, and in a closed position in which the guide member is in a position where the guide surface is the upper surface. The guiding surface of the guiding member is slidably displaceable between an open position that extends toward the front side of the ball opening and allows a game ball rolling on the guiding surface to enter the ball opening; The pair of protrusions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming machines A11 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the guiding member has a guiding surface that has a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance opening. formed,
The pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since the game balls are arranged, the game balls that are guided (rolled) on the guide surface can be reliably biased by bringing them into contact with the protruding portions. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, one protruding part and the other protruding part are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of protrusions. Therefore, one side in the width direction (
A game ball that enters from the other side) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close the pair of wing members. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are placed in a permissible position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry hole, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means. and a regulating means arranged at a regulating position that regulates entry of game balls into the ball entry hole when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members are closed or the pair of wing members are closed. A gaming machine B1, wherein the regulating means is formed so as to be maintainable at the regulating position when the wing member is opened from the outside.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. a driving means for causing the
When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are placed in a permissible position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, after the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the regulating means can be moved from the regulating position to the permissible position, which has the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance. The problem was that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means is formed so that it can be maintained at the regulating position in the state where the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Note that the restriction position for regulating the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at a predetermined position. In other words, when the ball entrance is provided with a passage connected to the ball entrance and through which the game balls flowing from the ball entrance pass, the regulating position by the regulating means (the position at which the game balls are stopped) is further away from the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream from the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path that flows from the ball entrance and passes through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position of the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage to detect passage of game balls; It may be downstream.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotational position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and when the slide transmission member is slid to the open slide position, the restriction is closed. When the means is placed in the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slid to the closed slide position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, When the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. A gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are As a result of this engagement, sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, making it easier to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entry opening.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members is forcibly opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position. In such a state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, so that the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (if the restriction means is permissible). (This can prevent unauthorized forced displacement from the outside.) As a result, even if a pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is allowed to pass between the pair of wing members, the regulating means will prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance. can.

In the game machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other, and the sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transfer member is transmitted and the rotation transfer member is rotated, and the slide protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby opening the slide transfer member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other. By sliding along the sliding groove, the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, thereby transmitting the slide transmission. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open sliding position is restricted, the restriction can be made less likely to be released while achieving miniaturization.

That is, the sliding groove and the sliding protrusion for transmitting the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the rotation transmitting member for rotation can be used to form a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the open slide position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such a means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by having a structure in which the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside can be made difficult.
This makes it difficult for the restriction (engagement) to be released.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmitting member that is rotated to a rotational position so that at least the pair of wing members can be closed, the regulating means is disposed on the rotational transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to an open rotational position; When the restriction means is placed in the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation is rotated. When the transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are Since the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance opening illegally.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside or by directly operating the rotation transmitting member, the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the open position. Even if the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged,
Since the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (that is, the restriction means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance by the regulating means.

In the game machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protruding portion is protruded along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4, a protrusion protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member is engageable with the protrusion. Since the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member, the engagement between the protrusion and the engagement part is achieved by utilizing the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member. It is possible to switch between the engagement and the release of the engagement, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member) that the protrusion can come into contact with, or a hole or a recess into which the protrusion can be inserted (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member). It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position by the protruding portion coming into contact with the engaging portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engaging portion be a hole or a recess. Since the protruding part is inserted into the engaging part, the space required for disposing the protruding part can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the size of the protruding part. This is because the protrusion can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the protrusion from the outside difficult.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized in that it includes a closing side abutting part that abuts the pair of wing members and closes the pair of wing members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. , and a closing-side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position, so that it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member attempts to rotate toward the open rotation position.
In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member can be controlled by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, and to make it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

The game machine B4 or B5 includes a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmitting member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine comprising an opening-side contact portion that opens when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward a closed rotation position, and the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. B
7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. The blade member is provided with an opening-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. When the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and external force due to such forced opening can be prevented from being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member can be suppressed.

Note that the biasing means includes a spring (
Examples include a torsion spring or a coil spring), a magnet that biases a pair of wing members in the closing direction with an attractive force, and the like.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the regulation means has a regulation position downstream of the detection means, and Game machine B8 characterized in that the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the detection means.
.

According to the gaming machine B8, any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulating means has a regulating position downstream from the detecting means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, if the wing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the detection means will detect the game ball. This state can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the detection means continues beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

<About the concept of the invention using the decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first reel formed to be rotatable and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and formed to be rotatable, the first reel has a cylindrical shape. The second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and includes a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer circumferential wall, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface. a second outer circumferential wall that faces the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall at a predetermined distance; and a second outer circumferential wall that extends radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer circumferential wall, and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall faces the inner surface of the first side wall. and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is provided to stand from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other. Machine C1.

Here, the first reel is rotatably formed, and the second reel is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and is rotatably formed (i.e., a double reel structure is provided). (e.g., Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230693). There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-28241).

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is,
In the double reel structure, space cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel) to install the above-mentioned rotating brush. The outer peripheral surface of the second reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer circumferential wall formed in a cylindrical shape,
a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer circumferential wall, the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer surface thereof is spaced apart from the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall by a predetermined distance. a second outer circumferential wall that faces each other, and a second side wall that extends radially inward from one axial side of the second outer circumferential wall and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval. Since the upright portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other, the upright portion extends between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. By being displaced in the circumferential direction, wind pressure is generated, and using this wind pressure, air can be made to flow between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall can be cleaned. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall or a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall The wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the gaps escapes through the openings and divided portions, which weakens the wind pressure, and the difference between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall increases accordingly. It becomes difficult for the air between them to flow.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably supported at the center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported at the center. A game machine C3 comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall and the second support wall.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall that supports the first side wall and the second support wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or air is introduced from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can be inhaled. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall accordingly. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the opening is formed at least in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is provided on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or inhaling air through the opening can be easily achieved. . That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the upright part is provided, the other reel, on which the opening part is formed, is stopped, thereby preventing air from flowing through the opening part. flow(
(exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, wherein the upright portions are erected at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, respectively. C5
.

In gaming machine C5, in any of gaming machines C1 to C4, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second
Since the upright portions are erected at different positions in the radial direction from the outer surface of the side wall, no matter whether the first reel or the second reel is rotated, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second Wind pressure can be generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the outer surfaces of the two side walls. Therefore, in the production by rotating the first reel or the second reel, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are provided on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the upright portions are arranged along a circumferential direction and are erected on a second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer circumferential wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and the second outer circumferential wall of the second reel is formed so as to be transparent. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols as the second reel rotates through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, which rotates more frequently than the first reel. , it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall when the first reel or the second reel is rotated.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
It includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means A gaming machine D1 arranged along a curve, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, the substrate includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means Gaming machines are known that are arranged along the lines (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the light emitting means, and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of sectioned surfaces corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , a gaming machine D2 characterized in that the partition widths of the plurality of partition screens when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the transparent member (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transparent member is viewed from the front, a region where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the distance is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, it is equipped with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member is compatible with a plurality of light emitting means. It has a plurality of partitions divided into sections, and the partition widths of the plurality of partitions when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be approximately the same, so that the amount of light of each partition that is visually recognized when viewed from the front of the transmission member is approximately the same. It can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D2, wherein a light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusivity can be ensured (light can be emitted over a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

A game machine D4 in which at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In any one of gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward a side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transparent member. A gaming machine D5, characterized in that it faces between the member and the dividing screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. faces between the transparent member and the dividing surface, so that the substrate can be disposed perpendicularly to the transparent member. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the transmitting member, the substrate, and the reflecting member can be increased. In this case, the dividing screen is arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, so that the light reflected on the dividing screen is directed to the back surface of the transmitting member. It can be made uniformly incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflective member includes a continuous surface that is continuous with the division screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is convex toward the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the reflective member is provided with a continuous surface that is continuous with the partition screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is connected to the light-emitting means. Since the light emitting surface is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface, the light reflected from the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A plurality of rotating drums formed to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals, and a decorative member disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and at least a part of which is transparent. and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the substrate is arranged in an attitude such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine E1 provided therein includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of drums are formed to be rotatable and are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and the drums are disposed between the plurality of drums and at least a part thereof has optical transparency. A decorative member and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, the board being arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine that is installed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this game machine,
Not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member, and the pattern of the decorative member can be It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to see the pattern integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since it is provided with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. Even when the substrate is disposed, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity can be created between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum, and is formed with an outer edge extending to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum when viewed from the front. Since it is formed so as to protrude, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum can be brought closer together, the decorative member and the drum can be integrated. It makes it easier to create a sense of experience.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region on the board where the light emitting means is mounted and the pattern on the decorative member are connected. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from an axial end surface of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area on the board where the light emitting means is mounted. and the area where the pattern is formed in the decorative member, and the back surface of the reflective member is
Since the decorative member is tilted in a direction away from the axial end face of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means is maintained, and the back surface of the decorative member is It is possible to bring the drum close to the outer circumferential surface of the drum and to insert the drum deep into the back of the decorative member (bring the drum close to the substrate). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4, which is the gaming machine E2 or E3, wherein the light emitting means is mounted on both sides of one side and the other side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both one surface and the other surface of the board, so that the light emitting means mounted on one surface Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the drums arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the board can be suppressed, the drum can be moved deeper into the back of the decorative member (the drum can be moved closer to the board). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, which are disposed opposite to each other and are movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. a base member; the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member;
a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism each displaceably supporting the displacement member; the support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member; The second displacement member, which is on the opposite side to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of
A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the support aspect of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the displacement member.

Here, a first displacement member and a second displacement member are disposed facing each other and are formed to be movable in the direction of approaching or separating, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other.
A game machine equipped with a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106844).
. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where their opposing sides abut, an object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be visually recognized. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the object. , it is also possible to perform a presentation (a presentation that draws attention to the operation of removing the mask) before the mask is removed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to make the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member come into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support a first displacement member and a second displacement member, respectively, on the base member,
The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that abuts one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. Since the supporting aspect of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the second displacement member, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought into contact with each other, the first The support mode of the support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to opposite sides (to sides rotated by 180 degrees around the centers of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). Thereby, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Examples of ways in which the support state is biased to one side include, for example, when the rigidity of the constituent members on one side and the other side is different (dimensions, number of constituent members, materials, etc.) The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between component parts on one side and the other side (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the difference in the number of connecting parts, etc.) The ease with which one side and the other side are displaced toward each other (biasing force received from biasing means, gravity, etc.)
Examples include those with different displacement (resistance during sliding and rotation, etc.), and those that combine these.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism shift their higher rigidity side (lower side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (higher side). ) can be faced. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and On the less rigid side, a state can be formed in which the opponent is accepted (retreats). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of first connecting members. the first driving means respectively transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first driving means and having different configurations from each other.
The second support mechanism includes a transmission member on one side and a first transmission member on the other side, and the second support mechanism includes a second drive means that generates a driving force, and a pair of second connections that connect the second displacement member to the base member. parts and
A game machine comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members and have different configurations from each other. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member. , a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first drive means to the pair of first connection members and have mutually different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes: A second driving means that generates a driving force; a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member are provided with different configurations, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and there is no gap between the opposite sides. Formation can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism is positioned on the side where the driving force is larger or the transmission timing of the driving force is, for example, It is possible to create a state in which the opponent is pushed (moved forward) on the earlier side, and the opponent is accepted (retracted) on the side where the driving force is smaller or the transmission timing of the driving force is later. the result,
The opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposite sides can be suppressed.

Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) have different configurations, for example, the rigidity (structure Examples include items with different dimensions, number of parts, materials, etc.), items with different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in connecting parts, etc.), and combinations of these. be done. That is, due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is connected to the base member. A gaming machine F3 is rotatably supported on the same axis as the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the base member and coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In this case, even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged so that the opposite sides thereof are connected to each other. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when they are brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member has its opposite sides in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connection member and the second connection member in an elastically compressed state, so that the first displacement member and When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when using the bias of the support mode.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first support mechanism that generates a driving force.
a driving means, a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and a first connecting member that applies different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, respectively. The second support mechanism includes a first biasing member on one side and a first biasing member on the other side, and the second support mechanism is driven by the second drive means and the second displacement member. A pair of second connecting members that connect the member to the base member, and a second one-side urging member and a second other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A game machine F5 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and
A pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first side urging member and a first other side urging member that respectively apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members, Second
The support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a second connecting member of the pair. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the members are provided, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the opposite sides It is possible to suppress the formation of gaps between them.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other party (moves forward) on the side where the biasing force is large. ), it is possible to form a state in which the side with the smaller urging force accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Note that the first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration.
That is, the urging forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be made different by having different positions where the urging forces are applied or by having different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first support mechanism that generates a driving force.
a driving means; a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member; and applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. and a first biasing member that generates a driving force, and the second support mechanism is driven by the second drive means and connects the second displacement member to the base member. A gaming machine F6 comprising a pair of second connecting members and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force, and the first supporting mechanism
The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and a pair of second connecting members that are attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies force is provided, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

That is, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other on the side where the biasing force is applied (for example). At the same time, the side on which the biasing force is not applied can accept the opponent (retreat). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the game machine F3 or F4, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is connected to the second connecting member.
a first torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member; as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member; At least one of a connection position between one leg of the torsion spring and the first connection member and a connection position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding portion. Game machine F7.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3 or F4, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first
Since the first torsion spring applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the displacement member closer to the second displacement member, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction of approaching the second displacement member, the first connecting member The driving force of the first driving means necessary to rotate the can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the second displacement member to the contact position where it is in contact with the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is longer, and the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by collision can be suppressed. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are
When the displacement members are reciprocated in the same direction, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased, and the performance effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine F7, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member. a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member; The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the and the second connecting member and a connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is particularly effective because the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed on both sides. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (arranged in the gravity direction position), and the position where they contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the distance between the two is The configuration of gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F7, characterized in that the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F7, the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, so that the first displacement member is moved downward in the direction of gravity. The more the first displacement member is positioned, the stronger the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity can be. ).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity from a stopped state, the displacement (rise) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member can be stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage caused by collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the gaming machine F9, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity; As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of bringing the second connecting member closer to
At least one of a connection position between one leg of the torsion spring and the second connection member or a connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding portion. Game machine F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F9, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is connected to the second connecting member. a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the displacement member from the first displacement member;
Since the displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacement member, that is, the second displacement member is moved upward in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) the first connecting member against the above, the driving force of the second driving means necessary to rotate the first connecting member can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring.
Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the second displacement member is spaced apart from the first displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of raising (in the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore,
For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

<Characteristics Group G> (Independent drum in front of the drum)
a determination means capable of executing a determination; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means; and a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a particular determination result. A gaming machine having a privilege awarding means for awarding benefits advantageous to the player, wherein the identification information is constituted by a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and the gaming machine has A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing a row, and a switching means for switching the content of the action dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a medium on which identification information (patterns) are printed to show the jackpot lottery results is used to display effects on the game board to show the jackpot lottery results. A gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing a variable display by rotating a reel or a belt (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 Publication No.). The gaming machine described above notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating a medium on which a pattern is actually printed, so it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuating display. However, the variable display can only be performed in a predetermined display mode (a display mode that only displays printed symbols), and the variation in effect display is limited, making it difficult for players to enjoy the game. The problem was that it got boring quickly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game by diversifying the variations of the variable display in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the content of the operation in which the symbol rows are dynamically displaced is switched by the switching means, the effects caused by the dynamic displacement of the symbol rows can be varied in a variety of ways, and the player can quickly become bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing problems that occur.

In the gaming machine G1, the identification information is composed of a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and a second symbol row that can be arranged on the front side or the rear side of the first symbol row. The dynamic displacement means dynamically displaces the first symbol row and the second symbol row in different directions, and the switching means includes: A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the content of the operation is switched by switching the visual recognition state between the first symbol row and the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the switching means switches the viewing state, so that it becomes possible for the player to switch between the first symbol row and the second symbol row for viewing. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by showing dynamic displacement in different directions.

In the gaming machine G1, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row has a transparent part that makes the first symbol row visible. A gaming machine G3, wherein the switching means changes the content of the action that is visible to the player by changing the position of the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, by changing the position of the visible transparent part, the visibility state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be changed, and a variety of displays can be achieved. It has the effect of being able to do the following.

In either gaming machine G2 or G3, a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and when the plurality of symbol rows stop, the determination result is notified based on the combination of the symbols in each symbol row. The second symbol row is composed of one symbol row, and the determination result is notified by one symbol when the symbol row stops. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, since the number of symbol rows is different between the first symbol row and the second symbol row, it is possible to provide the player with different notification modes of determination results. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristics H group> (drum in normal mode, 7 segments in time saving mode)
A determining means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the identification information displayed on the display means; a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for awarding a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; a settable gaming state setting means; and a dynamic displacement mode determining means for determining a mode of dynamic displacement by the dynamic displacement means in response to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. The identification information is composed of a plurality of different symbols, and indicates the determination result by a combination of the plurality of different symbols, and the dynamic displacement means is configured by the gaming state setting means to When one gaming state is set, the plurality of different symbols are dynamically displaced in a predetermined order, and when a second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, A gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to be dynamically displaced from one symbol to another arbitrary symbol among the plurality of different symbols.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a medium on which identification information (patterns) are printed to show the jackpot lottery results is used to display effects on the game board to show the jackpot lottery results. A gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing a variable display by rotating a reel (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 Publication No.). The gaming machine described above notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating a medium on which a pattern is actually printed, so it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuating display. However, since it is only possible to perform a variable display according to the order of the printed symbols, it is easy for the player to predict the result of the game (identification information (symbols) that are stopped and displayed). There was a problem that the players got tired of the game early. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the content of the displacement of the symbols is produced differently depending on the gaming state, it is possible to switch between a case where the type of symbol to be displaced next can be predicted and a presentation where prediction is difficult. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine H1, the identification information is composed of a symbol row in which the plurality of different symbols are arranged, and a display symbol in which some of the plurality of different symbols are displayed by lighting up, The displacement means dynamically displaces the symbol row in the first gaming state, and dynamically displaces the display symbol by controlling lighting in the second gaming state. Game machine H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the symbol row is dynamically displaced in the first gaming state, and the displayed symbols are dynamically displaced by lighting control in the second gaming state. In the second game state, dynamic displacement can be performed in a short period of time, and there is an effect that it is possible to perform a short period of time.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the dynamic displacement mode determining means determines that when the first gaming state is set, the dynamic period is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is configured to facilitate determining a dynamic displacement mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the first gaming state, a longer dynamic period than the second period is more likely to be determined, so by using the long dynamic display period, This has the effect of being able to notify the player of the dynamic displacement of the symbols in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Features I group> (variable display area size)
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance, a performance means having a performance execution area in which a performance is executed by the performance execution means, and a benefit that is advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed. A gaming machine having a privilege granting means, comprising: a variable means for varying the effect execution area; and a variable control means for causing the variable means to vary the effect execution area in response to the effect to be executed. A gaming machine I1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to display effects on the game board to show the jackpot lottery results, a medium (on which identification information (patterns) to show the jackpot lottery results are printed) is used. For example, a gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing a variable display by rotating reels or belts has been proposed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Public bulletin). The above-mentioned gaming machines were able to make players interested in the variable display, but since the device is actually driven and controlled to execute the variable display, it is necessary to use a liquid crystal display device. There was a problem in that it was more difficult to change the performance mode of the variable display than in the conventional gaming machine used, and it was not possible to improve the interest of the game. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the performance execution area is changed in accordance with the performance being executed, the performance being executed can be determined by the performance execution area, making it easy to understand the performance being executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine I1 has performance period determining means for determining a performance execution period to be executed by the performance execution means, and the performance execution means has a plurality of continuous performance periods within the performance execution period determined by the performance period determination means. The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a continuous performance in which a performance is executed, and the variable control means is configured to vary the performance execution area in accordance with the number of times the continuous performance is performed. I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the effect execution area is changed in accordance with the number of times the continuous effect is executed, so it is possible to identify the number of times the continuous effect is executed by the effect execution area. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a determination means capable of making a determination, and the performance execution means dynamically displays a combination of a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged, and then stops and displays them. It is configured such that the determination result by the determination means can be indicated by a combination of each symbol row stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the effective line corresponds to the fact that the production execution area is varied by the variable means. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the setting is increased or decreased.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the active line increases or decreases in response to the performance executed by the performance execution means, so that the player can expect various wins. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristics J group> (Production that creates an effective line)
A determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a case where the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In the gaming machine, the identification information is configured to be able to indicate the determination result by combining a plurality of symbols; A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols and then stopping and displaying the plurality of symbols in a combination for indicating the determination result on a predetermined active line, and a specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has an active line setting means that can set a specific active line different from the active line.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to display an effect on the game board to show the lottery results of a jackpot, a plurality of pieces of identification information (patterns) to show the lottery results of the jackpot are printed. Equipped with a display device (e.g., reel-type display device, belt-type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating a medium (e.g., reel or belt), a plurality of pieces of identification information ( A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player of a jackpot lottery result based on a combination of symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). In the gaming machines described above, the specific display position where the identification information (symbols) is stopped and displayed to indicate the jackpot lottery result is fixed, so that the player can see the result of the game (the identification information that is stopped and displayed). There is a problem in that the symbols)) can be easily predicted and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a specific condition is satisfied, a specific active line different from a predetermined active line is set by the active line setting means, so that a specific determination result is set on the predetermined active line. In addition to displaying symbols to indicate the above, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine J1 has a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol in addition to the plurality of symbols, and the effective line setting means is configured to display a symbol between the symbol display means and some of the plurality of symbols. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that when a specific combination is obtained as a result of combining the above, a specific active line is set as the fulfillment of the specific condition.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, a specific condition is satisfied by the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, so that there is interest in symbols other than those displayed on the predetermined active line. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine J2, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are configured such that dynamic display starts when a specific symbol among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed. Game machine J3 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, dynamic display is started when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the user expects the specific symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

A gaming machine J4, wherein the symbol display means is configured to dynamically display the symbols by switching between a lit state and a non-lit state.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are displayed dynamically by switching between a lit state and an unlit state, so that the symbols can be displayed multiple times in a short period of time. This has the effect of being able to display the target.

<Feature K group> (displays the number of time savings in 7-segment display)
A determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a case where the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A game machine having a bonus granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player, and in which a specific gaming state can be set in which a determination by the determining means is likely to be executed for a period until a specific condition is satisfied. The game is characterized by having a state setting means, and a notification means for notifying the player of information corresponding to the remaining period until the specific condition is satisfied, using at least a part of the identification information. Game machine K1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, display means (7-segment A gaming machine equipped with a display device) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-11180). Additionally, in a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display, a function that allows the player to set a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state) for a predetermined period of time, and displays on the liquid crystal display the remaining period in which the time-saving state can be set. (For example, a gaming machine having a function of displaying the number of shortened remaining time) has also been proposed. By the way, the gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned 7-segment display device can only notify the player of information using 7 segments, so compared to the gaming machine equipped with a conventional liquid crystal display, the gaming machine equipped with the 7-segment display device is Since the amount of information that can be reported is reduced, there is a problem in that, for example, it is difficult to notify the player of the number of remaining time reductions described above. Further, if a dedicated display means is provided to display the number of shortened remaining hours, there is a problem in that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine increases. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by making it possible to notify the number of times the remaining time is shortened using a 7-segment display device that performs an effect display to show the jackpot lottery result. shall be.

A gaming machine K2 in the gaming machine K1, wherein the display means has a 7-segment display section, and the identification information is constituted by a pattern displayed by the 7-segment display section.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and then stopping and displaying it in a manner to show the determination result, and a period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determining means for determining.

In the gaming machine K3, a regulation setting a regulation period for regulating the dynamic display of the identification information after the identification information is stopped and displayed until the next dynamic display of the identification information starts. A gaming machine K4, characterized in that it has a period setting means.

In the gaming machine K3, after the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result using the identification information, the display is changed from the mode for indicating the determination result to the A gaming machine K5 characterized in that information is displayed in a switched manner.

<Characteristics Group L> A determination means capable of executing a determination that varies the number of effective lines by rotating the shutter, a display means on which identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is displayed, and a display means specific to the display means. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine includes a benefit granting means that grants a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed. The device is configured to be able to display the determination result, and after dynamically displaying the plurality of symbols, the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in a combination for indicating the determination result. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display means capable of displaying images.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a medium on which identification information (patterns) are printed to show the jackpot lottery results is used to display effects on the game board to show the jackpot lottery results. A gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing a variable display by rotating a reel or a belt (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 Publication No.). The gaming machine described above notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating a medium on which a pattern is actually printed, so it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuating display. However, the variable display can only be performed in a predetermined display mode (a display mode that only displays printed symbols), and the variation in effect display is limited, making it difficult for players to enjoy the game. The problem was that it got boring quickly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game by diversifying the variations of the variable display in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine L1, after dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of symbols in a combination for indicating a judgment result on a predetermined active line, so that the user can become interested in the active line. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 includes a variable member capable of changing the size of the display area of the display means, and by changing the variable member, the size of the display area is changed, so that the effective A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the number of lines can be increased or decreased.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the effective line increases or decreases by varying the variable member, so by varying the variable member, the degree of expectation for a specific judgment result can be varied. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature M group> (The BGM (stop sound) when the symbol stops is a clear BGM (stop sound))
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, and a benefit granting means granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determining means is a predetermined determination result, A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and a dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. at least a sound output means capable of outputting sound during a period in which the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information, and a sound type for setting the type of sound output by the sound output means. and a setting means, wherein the audio type setting means sets the audio type according to a stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that it is a gaming machine M1.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to display effects to show jackpot lottery results. There was one that played back the audio that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by having a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the sound being played (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced audio, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced audio. The timing at which a part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of a jackpot should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which part of the identification information is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the audio to be played is emphasized and output (timing at which the beat beats). There was a problem with this. In this way, if the timing for emphasizing the performance display and the timing for emphasizing the audio are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing of the performance to be focused on, and the visual There has been a problem in that it is not possible to perform a performance (performance display) and an auditory performance (audio output) as a unified performance. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine M1, since the type of sound can be set according to the stop timing of the identification information, it is possible to output the sound in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information, and to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. This has the effect of being configurable.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means is configured to display a plurality of symbol rows in different ways. A dynamic display mode is set in which the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at certain timings, and the sound type setting means sets the same type of sound at each timing in which the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, the same type of sound can be output in accordance with the plurality of stop timings set by the dynamic display mode setting means, so that the same type of sound can be output during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. This has the effect of providing an immersive performance.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the sound output means is capable of outputting a second sound different from the sound set by the sound type setting means, and is different from the sound set by the sound type setting means. , the second sound, and a correction means for correcting the output mode of the second sound based on the determination result of the output timing determination means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M3, the output mode of the second sound can be corrected based on the determination result of the output timing between the sound output based on the stop timing of the identification information and the output timing of the second sound. This has the effect that the audio that is output based on the stop timing can be output with priority over other audio.

In the gaming machine M3, the correction means causes the output timing determination means to change the output of the second sound if the output timing of the sound and the output timing of the second sound overlap within a predetermined period. Gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is prohibited.

According to the gaming machine M4, when the sound output in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information overlaps with other sounds, the output of other sounds is prohibited, so that the sound is output in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to hear the voice being played.

The gaming machine M4 includes a volume adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output by the sound output means or the second sound, and when the output of the second sound is prohibited by the correction means. A gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the volume of the second sound is adjusted to mute by a volume adjustment means.

According to the gaming machine M5, it is possible to make the player hear the first sound with priority over the player simply by adjusting the volume corresponding to the second sound, so that the processing of the correction means can be simplified. be.

In any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the second audio is a piece of music that is continuously output at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the musical piece is output as the second sound during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that the production effect can be enhanced. There is.

A gaming machine M7 in the gaming machine M6, wherein the output timing determining means determines the timing at which the audio is output and the timing of the beat of the music.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine M6, the output timing determining means determines the timing of outputting the sound and the timing of the beat of the music, so that the sound output from the sound output means is properly adjusted. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M7, the audio type setting means selects the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means when the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result. A gaming machine M8, characterized in that the type of the audio that is output at a timing different from the stop timing of the identification information included in the gaming machine M8.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the audio output timing is intentionally changed from the stop timing of the identification information. Since the game can be shifted, game results that are advantageous to the player can be notified with a presentation that feels strange, and there is an effect that a surprising game can be provided to the player.

<Features N group> (Change the scrolling speed of the drum depending on BGM with a different tempo)
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, and a benefit granting means granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determining means is a predetermined determination result, A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and a dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. at least a sound output means capable of outputting sound during a period in which the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information, and a sound type for setting the type of sound output by the sound output means. a setting means, and a voice type determining means for determining the type of the voice set by the voice type setting means, and the dynamic display mode setting means is configured to determine the type of voice based on the determination result of the voice type determining means. , a gaming machine N1 characterized in that dynamic display modes of the identification information are set differently.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to display effects to show jackpot lottery results. There was one that played back the audio that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by having a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the sound being played (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced audio, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced audio. The timing at which a part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of a jackpot should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which part of the identification information is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the audio to be played is emphasized and output (timing at which the beat beats). There was a problem with this. In this way, if the timing for emphasizing the performance display and the timing for emphasizing the audio are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing of the performance to be focused on, and the visual There has been a problem in that it is not possible to perform a performance (performance display) and an auditory performance (audio output) as a unified performance. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine N1, since the dynamic display mode can be varied based on the discrimination result of the voice type discrimination means, a dynamic display mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the voice output by the voice output means can be set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine N1, the voice type setting means is configured to be able to set at least a first voice type and a second voice type having a faster tempo than the first voice type, and A gaming machine N2 characterized in that the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the identification information differently according to the tempo of the voice type set by the voice type setting means. .

According to the gaming machine N2, the dynamic display speed can be varied in accordance with the tempo of the audio output from the audio output means, so that a sense of unity can be created between the output audio and the set dynamic display mode. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

A gaming machine N3 in the gaming machine N1 or N2, wherein the audio type setting means sets the audio type based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine N3, the player can predict the judgment result of the judgment means based on the type of sound output, so it is possible to make the player interested in the mode of the sound output. effective. Furthermore, since the dynamic display mode is set in accordance with the audio type set based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the determination result of the determination means can be easily predicted.

Any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3 is provided with a stop display mode setting means for setting a stop display mode of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display mode setting means is configured to determine the voice type. a first dynamic display mode set based on the determination result of the means; and a second dynamic display for causing the identification information dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode. A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it sets at least the following aspects.

According to the gaming machine N4, even if the dynamic display mode is set according to the set audio type, the identification information can be reliably stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. This has the effect that the determination result of the determination means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In gaming machine N4, the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the second dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display speed set as the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine N5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine N5, even if the dynamic display speed is set according to the set audio type, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means, so that the judgment This has the effect of being able to notify the player of the determination result of the means in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristics Group O> (Derivation of control that makes the BGM (stop sound) when the pattern stops clear BGM (stop sound))
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, and a benefit granting means granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determining means is a predetermined determination result, A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and a dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. at least a sound output means capable of outputting sound during a period in which the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information, and a sound type for setting the type of sound output by the sound output means. and a setting means, wherein the audio type setting means sets the audio type according to information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. Gaming machine O1 is characterized by:

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to display effects to show jackpot lottery results. There was one that played back the audio that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by having a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the sound being played (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced audio, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced audio. The timing at which a part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of a jackpot should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which part of the identification information is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the audio to be played is emphasized and output (timing at which the beat beats). There was a problem with this. In this way, if the timing for emphasizing the performance display and the timing for emphasizing the audio are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing of the performance to be focused on, and the visual There has been a problem in that it is not possible to perform a performance (performance display) and an auditory performance (audio output) as a unified performance. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine O1, since it is possible to set the type of sound according to the set dynamic display mode, it is possible to output the sound that matches the dynamic display mode, and it is possible to produce a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. This has the effect that it is possible to set the

<Feature P group> (BGM at the time of symbol stop is matched by making the tempo of the song the same, stop sound is set according to the tempo of the song and the symbol stop timing)
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, and a benefit granting means granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determining means is a predetermined determination result, A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and a dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. at least a sound output means capable of outputting sound during a period in which the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information, and a sound type for setting the type of sound output by the sound output means. a setting means, a voice type determining means for determining the type of the voice set by the voice type setting means, and a timing at which the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means satisfies a predetermined display condition. and a specific sound setting means for setting a specific sound to be output by the sound output means based on the judgment result of the timing judgment means and the judgment result of the sound type judgment means. A gaming machine P1 characterized by the following.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to display effects to show jackpot lottery results. There was one that played back the audio that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by having a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the sound being played (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced audio, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced audio. The timing at which a part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of a jackpot should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which part of the identification information is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the audio to be played is emphasized and output (timing at which the beat beats). There was a problem with this. In this way, if the timing for emphasizing the performance display and the timing for emphasizing the audio are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing of the performance to be focused on, and the visual There has been a problem in that it is not possible to perform a performance (performance display) and an auditory performance (audio output) as a unified performance. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine P1, the specific sound can be set based on the determination result of the timing determination means and the determination result of the voice type determination means, so that the dynamic display of the identification information and the output sound It is possible to set a specific sound that corresponds to any of them, and the effect is that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means is configured to display the plurality of symbol rows in different ways. The game is characterized in that a dynamic display mode is set in which the symbol row is stopped and displayed at a timing, and the timing determining means determines the timing at which the symbol row stops as a timing that satisfies the predetermined display condition. Machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, since it is possible to set a specific sound in accordance with the timing at which each symbol row stops, it is possible to set a specific sound suitable for the dynamic display mode to be executed, thereby increasing the production effect. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine P2, the voice type setting means sets one voice type from a plurality of voice types having different beat timings of the output voice, and the voice type discriminating means sets the voice type to one of a plurality of voice types having different beat timings of the output voice. A gaming machine P3 is characterized in that the timing of the beat of the voice type set by the voice type setting means is determined.

According to the gaming machine P3, the specific sound can be set in accordance with the timing of the beat of the sound output from the sound output means.

In the gaming machine P3, the specific voice setting means sets a specific voice with a beat corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determining means and the beat timing of the voice type determined by the voice type determining means. A gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it sets.

According to the gaming machine P4, a beat corresponding to the stop timing of each symbol row and the beat timing of the sound is set as the specific sound, so the output of the specific sound creates a sense of unity between the dynamic display mode and the sound. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine P4 has specific voice storage means for storing a plurality of the specific voices in advance, and the specific voice setting means stores the specific voice corresponding to the voice type set by the voice type setting means as the specific voice. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that settings are read from a storage means.

According to the gaming machine P5, by storing a specific voice corresponding to the voice type in the specific voice storage means in advance, it is possible to simplify the process for setting the specific voice.

A gaming machine P6 in the gaming machine P5, wherein the specific audio storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different beat intervals.

According to the gaming machine P6, the specific sound can be set in accordance with the interval between the stop timing of the symbol row and the timing of the beat of the sound, so there is an effect that the characteristic sound can be easily set.

A gaming machine P7 in the gaming machine P5 or P6, wherein the specific audio storage means stores a plurality of specific sounds having different output period lengths.

According to the gaming machine P7, by varying the length of the period in which the specific sound is output, it is possible to prevent the specific sound from being output for an unnecessarily long period.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2 in any of the gaming machines described above, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

A gaming machine K3, in any of the gaming machines described above, is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is determined, and a performance is performed to suggest and notify the player of the determination result. However, if the result of the judgment is a win, there are some games in which a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the game as a presentation to suggest the result of the judgment.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 includes a determining means capable of executing a determination, a display means on which identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means is displayed, and a gaming machine specified for the display means. and a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when identification information indicating the determination result of is displayed, and the identification information includes a symbol array composed of a plurality of symbols The gaming machine includes a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the symbol row, and a switching means for switching the content of the action dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the identification information is provided on a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and on the front side or rear side of the first symbol row. and a second symbol row that can be arranged, and the dynamic displacement means dynamically displaces the first symbol row and the second symbol row. The switching means switches the content of the operation by switching the visual recognition state between the first symbol row and the second symbol row.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the first symbol row is arranged on the rear side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row includes , a transparent part is formed that makes the first symbol row visible, and the switching means changes the content of the action that is visible to the player by varying the position of the second symbol row. be.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, in which a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and when the plurality of symbol rows stop, the number of symbols in each symbol row is The system is configured such that the judgment result is notified by the combination, and the second symbol row is composed of one symbol string, and when the symbol string stops, the judgment result is notified by the one symbol. It is configured so that
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a determining means capable of executing a determination, a display means displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and the determination result specific to the display means. and a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when identification information for indicating the above is displayed, and the identification information is composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols. The gaming machine includes a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the symbol row, and a switching means for switching the content of the action dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is composed of a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and a second symbol row that can be arranged on the front side or the rear side of the first symbol row. , the dynamic displacement means is for dynamically displacing the first symbol row and the direction for dynamically displacing the second symbol row in different directions; The content of the operation is switched by switching the visual recognition state between the symbol row and the second symbol row.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row is formed with a transparent part that makes the first symbol row visible. The switching means changes the content of the action that is visible to the player by changing the position of the second symbol row.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and when the plurality of symbol rows stop, the determination result is notified based on the combination of the symbols in each symbol row, and the second The symbol row is composed of one symbol row, and is configured such that the judgment result is notified by one symbol when the symbol row is stopped.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
80 Variable display unit (display means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S305 Determination means S2211 Dynamic display means

Claims (1)

a determination means capable of executing the determination;
a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine comprising: a benefit granting means that grants advantageous benefits to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern;
a variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state;
a variable control means capable of executing variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern;
The gaming machine is
The operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means as performance patterns for showing the determination results of the determination means. A performance pattern including the following can be determined based on at least the determination result of one of the determination means,
It is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means when the variable means is in the second state than when the variable means is in the first state. and
The variable control means is capable of varying the variable means in a variable manner included in the production pattern even when the identification information is not dynamically displayed ;
In the gaming machine, the variable control means is included in the performance pattern when the operating means operable by the player is operated under a situation where the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be executed based on a predetermined operation pattern. It is possible to bring the variable means into a state where it can be varied in a variable manner,
The gaming machine is
At least setting a second game state in which a performance pattern executed in a shorter period than in a predetermined first game state is more likely to be selected as a performance pattern for indicating the determination result of the determining means. is made possible,
When the second gaming state is set, the variable means is configured to be more easily varied to the second state than when the first gaming state is set,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a notification effect for forming a predetermined notification mode in combination with the variable means changed to the second state .

Images